81fr Dep-Ts Att

Framework 8.
Network T-Server for AT&T
Deployment Guide
The information contained herein is proprietary and confidential and cannot be disclosed or duplicated
without the prior written consent of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 2004–2012 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
About Genesys
Alcatel-Lucent's Genesys solutions feature leading software that manages customer interactions over phone, Web,
and mobile devices. The Genesys software suite handles customer conversations across multiple channels and
resources—self-service, assisted-service, and proactive outreach—fulfilling customer requests and optimizing
customer care goals while efficiently using resources. Genesys software directs more than 100 million customer
interactions every day for 4,000 companies and government agencies in 80 countries. These companies and agencies
leverage their entire organization, from the contact center to the back office, while dynamically engaging their
customers. Go to www.genesyslab.com for more information.
Each product has its own documentation for online viewing at the Genesys Technical Support website or on the
Documentation Library DVD, which is available from Genesys upon request. For more information, contact your sales
representative.
Notice
Although reasonable effort is made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the
time of release, Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc., cannot assume responsibility for any existing errors.
Changes and/or corrections to the information contained in this document may be incorporated in future versions.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security

You are responsible for the security of your system. Product administration to prevent unauthorized use is your
responsibility. Your system administrator should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the
features available that reduce your risk of incurring charges for unlicensed use of Genesys products.
Trademarks
Genesys, the Genesys logo, and T-Server are registered trademarks of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories,
Inc. All other trademarks and trade names referred to in this document are the property of other companies. The
Crystal monospace font is used by permission of Software Renovation Corporation, www.SoftwareRenovation.com.
Technical Support from VARs

If you have purchased support from a value-added reseller (VAR), please contact the VAR for technical support.
Technical Support from Genesys

If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, please contact Genesys Technical Support at the regional
numbers provided on page 11. For complete contact information and procedures, refer to the Genesys Technical
Support Guide.
Ordering and Licensing Information

Complete information on ordering and licensing Genesys products can be found in the Genesys Licensing Guide.
Released by
Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. www.genesyslab.com
Document Version: 81fr_dep-ts_att_01-2012_v8.1.001.00

Table of Contents
List of
Procedures ................................................................................................................... 7
Preface ................................................................................................................... 9
About Network T-Server for AT&T ............................................................. 9
Intended Audience................................................................................... 10
Reading Prerequisites ........................................................................ 11
Making Comments on This Document .................................................... 11
Contacting Genesys Technical Support................................................... 11
Document Change History ...................................................................... 12
Part 1 T-Server Deployment .................................................. 13

New for All T-Servers in 8.1..................................................................... 13
Chapter 1 T-Server Fundamentals........................................................................ 15

Learning About T-Server ......................................................................... 16
Framework and Media Layer Architecture.......................................... 16
T-Server Requests and Events ........................................................... 18
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol ............................................... 21
Redundant T-Servers .............................................................................. 22
Multi-Site Support .................................................................................... 26
Agent Reservation ................................................................................... 26
Client Connections .................................................................................. 27
Next Steps ............................................................................................... 27
Chapter 2 T-Server General Deployment ............................................................. 29

Prerequisites............................................................................................ 29
Software Requirements ...................................................................... 29
Hardware and Network Environment Requirements .......................... 31
Licensing Requirements ..................................................................... 31
About Configuration Options............................................................... 33
Deployment Sequence ............................................................................ 34
Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 3

Table of Contents
Deployment of T-Server........................................................................... 34
Configuration of Telephony Objects .................................................... 34
Configuration of T-Server.................................................................... 37
Installation of T-Server ........................................................................ 38
Next Steps ............................................................................................... 41
Chapter 3 Multi-Site Support................................................................................. 43

Multi-Site Fundamentals.......................................................................... 44
ISCC Call Data Transfer Service ............................................................. 45
ISCC Call Flows.................................................................................. 46
ISCC Transaction Types ..................................................................... 52
T-Server Transaction Type Support .................................................... 60
Transfer Connect Service Feature...................................................... 64
ISCC/Call Overflow Feature .................................................................... 65
Number Translation Feature.................................................................... 69
Number Translation Rules .................................................................. 70
Network Attended Transfer/Conference Feature..................................... 77
Event Propagation Feature...................................................................... 79
User Data Propagation ....................................................................... 80
Party Events Propagation ................................................................... 81
Switch Partitioning .............................................................................. 82
Event Propagation Configuration ........................................................ 83
ISCC Transaction Monitoring Feature ..................................................... 86
Configuring Multi-Site Support................................................................. 86
Applications ........................................................................................ 87
Switches and Access Codes .............................................................. 88
DNs ..................................................................................................... 94
Configuration Examples...................................................................... 99
Next Steps ............................................................................................. 100
Chapter 4 Starting and Stopping T-Server Components ................................. 101

Command-Line Parameters .................................................................. 101
Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer ............................... 103
Starting with Startup Files ...................................................................... 104
Starting Manually ................................................................................... 105
HA Proxy........................................................................................... 108
T-Server ............................................................................................ 109
Verifying Successful Startup ...................................................................111
Stopping Manually ..................................................................................111
Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager ....................... 112
Next Steps ............................................................................................. 112
4 Framework 8.1
Table of Contents
Part 2 T-Server Configuration ............................................. 113

New in Network T-Server for AT&T ....................................................... 114
Chapter 5 AT&T–Specific Configuration............................................................ 115

Manual Configuration of Telephony Objects.......................................... 115
Switching Office ................................................................................ 115
Service Numbers .............................................................................. 115
Chapter 6 Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T................. 117

T-Library Functionality ........................................................................... 117
Load Balancing...................................................................................... 125
T-Server Error Messages ...................................................................... 126
Voice-Processing Failure Messages................................................. 128
Known Limitations ................................................................................. 128
Chapter 7 Common Configuration Options....................................................... 131

Setting Configuration Options................................................................ 131
Mandatory Options ................................................................................ 132
log Section............................................................................................. 132
Log Output Options........................................................................... 138
Examples .......................................................................................... 142
Debug Log Options ........................................................................... 143
log-extended Section............................................................................. 146
log-filter Section..................................................................................... 148
log-filter-data Section............................................................................. 149
security Section ..................................................................................... 149
sml Section ............................................................................................ 149
common Section.................................................................................... 151
Changes from 8.0 to 8.1 ........................................................................ 152
Chapter 8 T-Server Common Configuration Options ....................................... 153

Setting Configuration Options................................................................ 153
TServer Section..................................................................................... 154
license Section ...................................................................................... 159
agent-reservation Section...................................................................... 162
extrouter Section ................................................................................... 163
ISCC Transaction Options ................................................................ 166
Transfer Connect Service Options.................................................... 170

Table of Contents
ISCC/COF Options ........................................................................... 170

Event Propagation Options ............................................................... 173
Number Translation Option............................................................... 174
GVP Integration Option..................................................................... 174
backup-sync Section ............................................................................. 174
call-cleanup Section .............................................................................. 176
Translation Rules Section...................................................................... 178
security Section ..................................................................................... 178
Timeout Value Format ........................................................................... 178
Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1.......................................................... 179
Chapter 9 Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T .................... 181

AsnSap Section ..................................................................................... 183
pgf Section............................................................................................. 186
crp Section............................................................................................. 186
Timers Section....................................................................................... 189
DecSs7 Section ..................................................................................... 189
NMS Section.......................................................................................... 190
OpenCall Section................................................................................... 192
Changes from 8.0 to 8.1 ........................................................................ 193
Appendix Installing and Configuring NMS SS7, TX3220 and TX4000............. 195
Installing and Configuring TX3220 ........................................................ 195
Sample Configuration Files ................................................................... 208
Sample MTP3 File (MTP3cp1.cfg).................................................... 209
Sample SS7 File (SCCPcp1.cfg) ...................................................... 212
Sample TCAP File (TCAPcp1.cfg).................................................... 215
Installing and Configuring TX4000 ........................................................ 216
Sample TX 4000 Configuration Files..................................................... 221
Sample TXCFG File (TXcfg1.txt) ...................................................... 221
Sample MTP3 File (mtp3cp1.cfg) ..................................................... 227
Supplements Related Documentation Resources ................................................... 231
Document Conventions ...................................................................... 233
Index ............................................................................................................... 235
6 Framework 8.1
List of Procedures
Configuring T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Configuring multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installing T-Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installing T-Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Verifying the installation of T-Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Activating Transfer Connect Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring Number Translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Activating Event Propagation: basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Modifying Event Propagation: advanced configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring T-Server Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring Default Access Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configuring access resources for the route transaction type . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring access resources for the dnis-pool transaction type . . . . . . 96
Configuring access resources for direct-* transaction types . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring access resources for ISCC/COF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring access resources for non-unique ANI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Modifying DNs for isolated switch partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring T-Server to start with the Management Layer. . . . . . . . . . 103
Starting T-Server on UNIX with a startup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Starting T-Server on Windows with a startup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Starting HA Proxy on UNIX manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Starting HA Proxy on Windows manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Starting T-Server on UNIX manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Starting T-Server on Windows manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Stopping T-Server on UNIX manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Stopping T-Server on Windows manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installing and configuring TX3220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing and configuring TX4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

List of Procedures
8 Framework 8.1
Preface
Welcome to the Framework 8.1 Network T-Server for AT&T Deployment
Guide. This document introduces you to the concepts, terminology, and
procedures relevant to T-Servers® in general and provides detailed reference
information about Network T-Server for AT&T. The reference information
includes, but is not limited to, configuration options, limitations, and
switch-specific functionality. You must configure the configuration objects and
options described in this document in the Framework Configuration Layer.
Use this document only after you have read through the Framework 8.1
Deployment Guide, and the Release Note for your T-Server.
This document is valid only for the 8.1 release of this product.
Note: For versions of this document created for other releases of this
product, visit the Genesys Technical Support website, or request the
Documentation Library DVD, which you can order by e-mail from
Genesys Order Management at orderman@genesyslab.com.
This preface contains the following sections:


About Network T-Server for AT&T, page 9
 Intended Audience, page 10

Making Comments on This Document, page 11
 Contacting Genesys Technical Support, page 11

Document Change History, page 12
For information about related resources and about the conventions that are
used in this document, see the supplementary material starting on page 231.
About Network T-Server for AT&T

T-Server is the Genesys software component that provides an interface
between your telephony hardware and the rest of the Genesys software
components in your enterprise. It translates and keeps track of events and
requests that come from, and are sent to, the CTI (computer-telephony
integration) link in the telephony device. T-Server is a TCP/IP-based server

Preface Intended Audience
that can also act as a messaging interface between T-Server clients. It is the
critical point in allowing your Genesys solution to facilitate and track the
contacts that flow through your enterprise.
Note that the T-Server name has changed over the course of previous releases
for various reasons (including, but not limited to, changes in vendor name or in
Genesys policy). The former names include:
• NIO AT&T.
• The current name is Network T-Server for AT&T.
Intended Audience
This guide is intended primarily for system administrators, both those who are
new to T-Server and those who are familiar with it.
• If you are new to T-Server, read the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide and
the Release Note mentioned earlier, and then read all of the sections of this
document that apply to your software and its accompanying components.
Refer back to the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide as needed.
• If you are an experienced T-Server user—someone with computer
expertise, who is used to installing, configuring, testing, or maintaining
Genesys software—you may find it more time efficient to go to the Index
to see what is new or different in T-Server release 8.1. If you take that
approach, please also read the Release Notes and refer to other related
resources, such as the Genesys Events and Models Reference Manual and
the Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API Reference for complete
information on T-Server events, call models, and requests.
In general, this document assumes that you have a basic understanding of, and
familiarity with:
• Computer-telephony integration concepts, processes, terminology, and
applications.
• Network design and operation.
• Your own network configurations.
• Your telephony hardware and software.
• Genesys Framework architecture and functions.
• Configuration Manager interface and object-managing operations.
Based on your specific contact center environment and your responsibilities in
it, you may need to be familiar with a much wider range of issues as you
deploy T-Server.
10 Framework 8.1
Preface Making Comments on This Document
Reading Prerequisites
You must read the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide before using this
Network T-Server Deployment Guide. That book contains information about
the Genesys software you must deploy before deploying T-Server.
Making Comments on This Document

If you especially like or dislike anything about this document, feel free to
e-mail your comments to Techpubs.webadmin@genesyslab.com.
You can comment on what you regard as specific errors or omissions, and on
the accuracy, organization, subject matter, or completeness of this document.
Please limit your comments to the scope of this document only and to the way
in which the information is presented. Contact your Genesys Account
Representative or Genesys Technical Support if you have suggestions about
the product itself.
When you send us comments, you grant Genesys a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate, without incurring
any obligation to you.
Contacting Genesys Technical Support

If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, contact Genesys
Technical Support at the following regional numbers:
Region Telephone E-Mail
North America and +888-369-5555 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com

Latin America +506-674-6767
Europe, Middle East, and +44-(0)-1276-45-7002 support@genesyslab.co.uk

Africa
Asia Pacific +61-7-3368-6868 support@genesyslab.com.au
Malaysia 1-800-814-472 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com.au

+61-7-3368-6868 (International)
India 000-800-100-7136 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com.au

+61-7-3368-6868 (International)
Japan +81-3-6361-8950 support@genesyslab.co.jp
Before contacting technical support, refer to the Genesys Technical Support Guide for complete contact
information and procedures.

Preface Document Change History
Document Change History

This is the first release of the Framework 8.1 Network T-Server for AT&T
Deployment Guide. In the future, this section will list topics that are new or
that have changed significantly since the first release of this document.
12 Framework 8.1
Part
1 T-Server Deployment
Part One of this Network T-Server Deployment Guide familiarizes the reader
with T-Server in general. It addresses architectural, functional, and procedural
information common to all T-Servers.
The information in Part One is divided into the following chapters:
• Chapter 1, “T-Server Fundamentals,” on page 15, describes T-Server, its
place in the Framework 8 architecture, T-Server redundancy, and multi-site
issues. It stops short of providing configuration and installation
information.
• Chapter 2, “T-Server General Deployment,” on page 29, presents
configuration and installation procedures for all T-Servers.
• Chapter 3, “Multi-Site Support,” on page 43, details the variations
available for T-Server implementations across geographical locations.
• Chapter 4, “Starting and Stopping T-Server Components,” on page 101,
describes how, and in what order, to start up T-Server among other
Framework components. It also provides possible stopping commands.
New for All T-Servers in 8.1

Before looking at T-Server’s place in Genesys solutions and in the architecture
of the Genesys Framework, note the following general changes that have been
implemented in the 8.1 release of T-Server:
• T-Server no longer connects to applications that have disabled status in the
configuration environment.
• The default value of the background-processing configuration option has
been changed to true. See “background-processing” on page 154 for
details.

Part 1: T-Server Deployment New for All T-Servers in 8.1
• T-Server now supports the Unresponsive Process Detection feature. The

following configuration options enable this feature:

“heartbeat-period” on page 149

“hangup-restart” on page 150
For more information, refer to the Framework 8.1 Management Layer
User’s Guide.
• T-Server now supports IPv6. For more information, refer to the Framework
8.1 Deployment Guide.
• T-Server now supports Acresso FLEXNet Publisher v11.9 license manager.
Notes: • Configuration option changes common to all T-Servers are

described in “Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1” on page 179.
• For information about the new features that are available in your
T-Server in the initial 8.1 release, see Part Two of this document.
14 Framework 8.1
Chapter
1 T-Server Fundamentals
This chapter provides general information about T-Server features and
functionality and about its configuration and installation. For reference
information about your specific T-Server and about options for all T-Servers,
see “Part Two: Reference Information.”
This chapter has various levels of information, some of it intended for people
who have configured, installed, and used previous releases of T-Server, and
some of it aimed at those less familiar with such T-Server operations. That
means some sections will not necessarily be relevant for you.
• If you are an experienced user of T-Server, start with “New for All
T-Servers in 8.1” on page 13, and then move to the chapters comprising
Part Two of this document, where specific information about your
T-Server is available.
• If you are new to T-Server, begin with “Learning About T-Server.” Once
you have read through that and subsequent sections, you are ready for the
other chapters in Part One that go into detail about T-Server configuration
and installation.
Generally, this chapter presents overview information that applies to all
T-Servers (and Network T-Servers) and their deployment. This chapter is
divided into the following sections:

Learning About T-Server, page 16

Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol, page 21
 Redundant T-Servers, page 22

Multi-Site Support, page 26

Agent Reservation, page 26
 Client Connections, page 27

Next Steps, page 27

Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Learning About T-Server
Learning About T-Server

The Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide provides you with a high-level
introduction to the role that T-Server plays in the Genesys Framework. If you
have already looked through that guide, you may recall that T-Server is the
most important component of the Framework Media Layer (the other two
components are Load Distribution Server (LDS) and HA Proxy). The Media
Layer enables Genesys solutions to communicate with various media,
including traditional telephony systems, voice over IP (VoIP), e-mail, and the
Web. This layer also provides the mechanism for distributing
interaction-related business data, also referred to as attached data, within and
across solutions.
Framework and Media Layer Architecture

Figure 1 illustrates the position Framework holds in a Genesys solution.
Agent
Desktop
Genesys
IVR Framework
Genesys
Applications
Switch
Figure 1: Framework in a Genesys Solution
Moving a bit deeper, Figure 2 presents the various layers of the Framework
architecture.
16 Framework 8.1
Framework
Services Layer
Routing
Services
Media Layer
Management
(including
Layer
T-Server)
Reporting
Configuration Services
Layer
Figure 2: The Media Layer in the Framework Architecture
T-Server is the heart of the Media Layer—translating the information of the

media-device realm into information that Genesys solutions can use. It enables
your contact center to handle the computer-based form of the interactions that
arrive and it translates the information surrounding a customer contact into
reportable and actionable data.
Figure 3 presents the generalized architecture of the Media Layer.
Internet Traditional VoIP

Media Telephony Telephony
Interaction T-Servers for

T-Servers
Server IP Solutions
SOLUTIONS
Figure 3: Media Layer Architecture
In addition to being the most important component of the Media Layer,

T-Server plays the most significant role in making information about
telephony traffic and its data available to Framework as a whole.
One or more components in practically every solution are T-Server clients.
Solutions comprise a number of different Genesys software packages, from
collections of components for various types of routing to those that allow for

outbound dialing to still others. Framework in general, and T-Server in

particular, enable these solutions to function in your enterprise.
T-Server has several typical clients: Stat Server, Interaction Concentrator,
Universal Routing Server, and agent desktop applications. T-Server gets the
information it needs about the enterprise from Configuration Server.
Additionally, if you use the Management Layer, T-Server provides its ongoing
status and various other log messages to server components of the
Management Layer (for instance, allowing you to set alarms).
T-Server Requests and Events

This section outlines the roles that T-Server plays in a contact center. While it
is possible to describe roles for all T-Servers, at a detailed level, T-Server’s
functionality depends on the hardware to which it is connected. (For example,
when connected to a traditional switch, it performs CTI functions, but when
connected to a VOIP-based telephony device, it controls IP traffic.) The CTI
connection is only for the switch.
Details of T-Server Functionality

T-Server is a TCP/IP server that enables intelligent communication between
media-specific protocols (such as the various CTI protocols, including CSTA
and ASAI) and TCP/IP-based clients of T-Server. Applications that are clients
to T-Server use the T-Library format to transmit requests to T-Server through a
TCP/IP socket. T-Server can then either translate those requests to CTI
protocol for switch use or relay them directly to other TCP/IP clients.
T-Server performs three general functions in the contact center: Bridging,
Messaging, and Interaction Tracking.
Bridging
T-Server acts as a platform-independent interface between media devices and
business applications. In the case of a telephony device, for instance, it
receives messages from and sends commands to the telephony equipment
using either CTI links provided by the switch manufacturer or interface
protocols provided by telephony network vendors.
On the client-application end, T-Server offers three models (call model, agent
model, and device model) unified for all switches. The core functionality (such
as processing an inbound call, an agent login, or a call-forwarding request)
translates into a unified application programming interface (API) called
T-Library, so that applications do not need to know what specific switch model
they are dealing with. On the other hand, T-Library accommodates many
functions that are unique to a specific switch, so that client applications are
able to derive the maximum functionality offered by a particular switch.
Refer to the Genesys Events and Models Reference Manual for complete
information on all T-Server events and call models and to the
18 Framework 8.1
TServer.Requests portion of the Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API
Reference for technical details of T-Library functions.
Messaging
In addition to translating requests and events for the client application involved
in an interaction, T-Server:
• Provides a subscription mechanism that applications can use to receive
notifications about interaction-related and non-interaction-related events
within the contact center.
• Broadcasts messages of major importance (such as a notification that the
link is down) to all clients.
• Broadcasts messages originated by a T-Server client to other T-Server
clients.
The subscription mechanism consists of two parts, the DN subscription and
event-type masking. Applications must register for a DN or a set of DNs to
receive notifications about all events that occur in association with each
registered DN. For example, when two softphone applications are registered
for the same DN, and the first application initiates a call from the DN,
T-Server notifies both applications that the call is initiated from the DN.
Client applications can also specify one or more types of events, and T-Server
will filter out events of the non-specified types and only send events of the
requested types. For example, if agent supervisors are interested in receiving
agent-related events, such as AgentLogin and AgentLogout, they have to mask
EventAgentLogin and EventAgentLogout, provided that a particular T-Server
supports these events.
The combination of each client’s subscription for DNs and masking of event
types defines what messages T-Server distributes to what client.
Interaction Tracking
T-Server maintains call information for the life of the call (or other
T-Server-supported media type) and enables client applications to attach user
data to the call. Call information includes:
• A unique identifier, connection ID, that T-Server assigns when creating
the call.
• Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS), if reported by the CTI link.
• User data that a client application (such as an Interactive Voice Response
unit or Genesys Universal Routing Server) provides.
Difference and Likeness Across T-Servers

Although Figure 3 on page 17 (and other figures) depicts T-Server that works
with telephony systems as a single product, this is a simplification. Because

almost every traditional telephony device has its own characteristics and
communication protocols, Genesys makes different T-Servers for different
telephony systems. (That means your T-Server will not work with another
switch.) Thus, all T-Servers play a common role in the architecture, but their
specific features differ from implementation to implementation, based on the
media device in use.
Despite their switch-based differences, T-Servers for telephony systems are
similar to one another in at least one important respect: they are all built with a
certain amount of shared software code. This shared code is rolled into a single
unit and is called T-Server Common Part (TSCP). TSCP is the central,
common component for all T-Servers and has its own Release Note, which is
accessible via a hyperlink from your T-Server’s Release Note.
Note: This document separates common-code features based on TSCP into

separate sections and chapters, such as the “T-Server Common
Configuration Options” chapter. These are the options for all
T-Servers that TSCP makes available for configuration.
T-Server Functional Steps During a Sample Call

The following example, Figure 4, outlines some basic steps that T-Server
might take when a call arrives from outside the contact center. In this scenario,
T-Server starts tracking the call even before it is delivered to the agent.
T-Server then informs the selected agent that a call has arrived. When the
switch delivers the call to the agent’s extension, T-Server presents account
information, collected at an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) unit, to the agent
at the agent desktop application.
6. T-Server notifies the

agent application of the call.
1. Switch notifies
T-Server of call
7. T-Server delivers the call
arrival. T-Server
data to the desktop.
assigns ConnID.
Agent Desktop
T-Server Application
3. IVR asks T-Server to attach the

2. Switch delivers a call to account number to the call.
IVR for automated service.
4. IVR sends the call

to an ACD queue.
IVR
5. ACD diverts the call to an agent DN.
Switch Agent DN
Figure 4: Functional T-Server Steps
20 Framework 8.1
Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol
Step 1
When the call arrives at the switch, T-Server creates a call in its internal
structure. T-Server assigns the call a unique identifier, connection ID.
Step 2
The switch delivers the call to an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) unit, which
begins automated interactions with the caller.
Step 3
IVR acquires user information from the caller through prompts and requests
T-Server to attach that information to the call. T-Server updates the call with
the user information.
Step 4
IVR sends the call to an ACD (Automated Call Distribution) queue.
Step 5
The ACD unit distributes the call to an available agent logged in to a particular
DN (directory number).
Step 6
T-Server notifies the agent desktop application that the call is ringing on the
agent DN. The notification event contains call data including ANI, DNIS, and
account information that the IVR has collected.
Step 7
The agent desktop application presents the account information, including the
name of the person whose account this is, on the agent’s screen, so that the
agent answering the call has all the relevant information.
These seven steps illustrate just a small part of T-Server’s bridging, messaging,
and interaction-processing capabilities.
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol

Since the 6.0 release of T-Server, the Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol
(ADDP) has replaced the Keep-Alive Protocol (KPL) as the method to detect

Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Redundant T-Servers
failures for certain T-Server connections, including connections between two

T-Servers and between a T-Server and its clients.
Notes: Starting with release 7.5, the KPL backward-compatibility feature is

no longer supported.
ADDP applies only to connections between Genesys software
components.
With ADDP, protocol activation and initialization is made on the client’s side
and you can change these parameters. No additional messages are sent when
there is existing activity over the connection. T-Server client applications and
the remote T-Server (if any) must be listening to the socket and respond
promptly to the polling signal for the connection to be preserved.
If you are going to enable ADDP, you must do it using the protocol,
addp-timeout, addp-remote-timeout, and addp-trace configuration options.
When configuring a timeout, consider the following issues:
• The configured timeout must be at least twice as long as the maximum
network latency.
• There may be an interval when T-Server does not check for network
activity.
• If the link connection fails but the client is not notified (for example,
because the host is turned off, or because a network cable is unplugged),
the maximum reaction time to a link-connection failure is equal to double
the configured timeout plus the established network latency.
Also keep in mind that the T-Server receiving the polling signal may not
respond immediately, and that a delay occurs after the polling signal, while the
response travels from one T-Server to another. If you do not account for these
contingencies when configuring a timeout, the connection that ADDP is
monitoring will be dropped periodically.
Redundant T-Servers
T-Servers can operate in a high-availability (HA) configuration, providing you
with redundant systems. The basics of each T-Server’s redundant capabilities
differ from T-Server to T-Server. One basic principle of redundant T-Servers is
the standby redundancy type, which dictates how quickly a backup T-Server
steps in when the primary T-Server goes down.
The Framework Management Layer currently supports two types of redundant
configurations: warm standby and hot standby. All T-Servers offer the warm
standby redundancy type and, starting with release 7.1, the hot standby
redundancy type is implemented in T-Servers for most types of switches. (See
Table 1.)
22 Framework 8.1
Instructions for configuring T-Server redundancy are available in Chapter 3,

“High-Availability Configuration and Installation.” Specifics on your
T-Server’s HA capabilities are outlined in Part Two of this document.
Note: IVR Server and some Network T-Servers can be configured for load
sharing or warm or hot standby; however, they do not support any
combination of these redundancy types. Details of your component’s
HA capabilities are discussed in Part Two of this document.
Support for Hot Standby Redundancy

in Various T-Servers
Use Table 1 to determine whether your T-Server supports the hot standby
redundancy type. The table also indicates whether HA Proxy components are
required for this support, and, if so, how many are required per pair of
redundant T-Servers (or per link if so noted).
Table 1 only summarizes hot standby redundancy support in various
T-Servers. For detailed, up-to-date information on the subject, see the Genesys
Supported Media Interfaces Reference Manual located on the Technical
Support website at
http://genesyslab.com/support/dl/retrieve/default.asp?item=A9CB309A
F4DEB8127C5640A3C32445A7&view=item.
Table 1: T-Server Support of the Hot Standby Redundancy Type
T-Server Type Hot Standby HA Proxy Number of HA

Supported Required Proxy Components
Aastra MXONE CSTA I Yes No —
Alcatel A4200/OXO Yes No —
Alcatel A4400/OXE Yes No —
Aspect ACD Yes No —
Avaya Communication Manager Yes Noa —
Avaya INDeX Yes No —
Avaya TSAPI Yes No —
Cisco UCCE Yes No —
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Yes No —
DataVoice Dharma Yes No —
Digitro AXS/20 Yes No —

Table 1: T-Server Support of the Hot Standby Redundancy Type (Continued)

EADS Intecom M6880 Yes No —
EADS Telecom M6500 Yes No —
eOn eQueue Yes No —
Fujitsu F9600 Yes No —
Huawei C&C08 Yes No —
Huawei NGN Yes No —
Mitel MiTAI Yes No —
NEC NEAX/APEX Yes No —
Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100 Yes Yesb, Noc 1 per link
Nortel Communication Server 1000 with Yes No —

SCCS/MLS
Philips Sopho iS3000 Yes Nod 1
Radvision iContact No — —
Samsung IP-PCX IAP Yes No —
Siemens Hicom 300/HiPath 4000 CSTA I Yes No —
Siemens HiPath 3000 Yes No —
Siemens HiPath 4000 CSTA III Yes No —
Siemens HiPath DX Yes No —
SIP Server Yes No —
Spectrum Yes No —
Tadiran Coral Yes No —
Teltronics 20-20 Yes Yes 1
Tenovis Integral 33/55 Yes No —
Network T-Serverse
AT&T No — —
24 Framework 8.1
Table 1: T-Server Support of the Hot Standby Redundancy Type (Continued)

Concert No — —
CRSP No — —
DTAG No — —
GenSpec No — —
ISCP No — —
IVR Server, using network configuration Yes — —
KPN No — —
MCI No — —
NGSN No — —
Network SIP Server No — —
Sprint No — —
SR3511 No — —
Stentor No — —
a. With release 7.1, T-Server for Avaya Communication Manager no longer uses HA Proxy for its support of
hot standby. Earlier releases of this T-Server require two HA Proxies to support hot standby.
b. For T-Server for Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100 in high-availability (hot standby) configuration,
Genesys recommends that you use link version SCAI14 or above with call-progress and noncontroller-re-
leased messages enabled. See the switch-specific information in Part 2 of this Deployment Guide for addi-
tional information on HA configurations.
c. Starting with release 7.5, T-Server for Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100 supports HA without HA
Proxy when operating in Dual CTI Links mode. See the switch-specific information in Part 2 of this De-
ployment Guide for additional information on HA configurations.
d. Starting with release 6.5.3, T-Server for Philips Sopho iS3000 supports HA both with and without HA
Proxy.
e. Although they do not support high availability per se, Network T-Servers do support a load-sharing schema.

Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Multi-Site Support
Multi-Site Support
Multi-site configuration implies the existence of two or more switches that
belong to the same enterprise or service provider, and that share the Genesys
Configuration Database. (In some cases this may include isolated partitions on
a given switch served by different T-Servers.) The main goal of T-Server
support for multi-site operations is to maintain critical information about a call
as it travels from one switch to another.
For instructions on installing and configuring a multi-site environment,
including information on the Inter Server Call Control (ISCC) features, please
see Chapter 3, “Multi-Site Support,” on page 43.
Agent Reservation
T-Server provides support for clients to invoke the agent reservation function,
TReserveAgent(). This function allows a server application that is a client of
T-Server to reserve a DN along with an agent, a Place, or both, so that no
other T-Server client can route calls to it during a specified reservation
interval. Alternatively, when clients use the ISCC feature (see “ISCC Call Data
Transfer Service” on page 45), they can use an agent reservation embedded in
an ISCC request. (To do so, clients have to specify a certain Extensions
attribute in an ISCC request when initiating an ISCC transaction. See page 52
for the list of ISCC requests.)
The reservation does not currently prevent the reserved objects from receiving
direct calls or calls distributed from ACD Queues; agent reservation is
intended as a way of synchronizing the operation of several clients. See
RequestReserveAgent in the Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API
Reference for more details on this function from the client’s point of view.
In addition to invoking the TReserveAgent function, you can customize the
Agent Reservation feature by configuring options in the T-Server Application
object. See“agent-reservation Section” on page 162 in the “T-Server Common
Configuration Options” chapter in Part Two for more details.
Starting with version 8.1, T-Server supports Agent Reservation failure
optimization, to ensure that only agent reservation requests of the highest
priority are collected. T-Server responds immediately with the EventError
message to existing or new reservation requests of a lower priority while
collecting the agent reservation requests of the highest priority only. This
functionality is controlled with the collect-lower-priority-requests
configuration option (see page 162).
26 Framework 8.1
Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Client Connections
Client Connections
The number of connections T-Server can accept from its clients depend on the
operating system that T-Server runs. Table 2 illustrates the number of client
connections that T-Server support.
Table 2: Number of T-Server’s Client Connections
Operating System Number of Connections
AIX 32-bit mode (versions 5.3) 32767
AIX 64-bit mode (versions 5.3, 6.1, 7.1) 32767
HP-UX 32-bit mode (versions 11.11) 2048
HP-UX 64-bit mode 2048

(versions 11.11, 11i v2, 11i v3)
HP-UX Itanium (version 11i v3) 2048
Linux 32-bit mode 32768

(versions RHEL 4.0, RHEL 5.0)
Linux 64-bit mode (version RHEL 5.0) 32768
Solaris 32-bit mode (version 9) 4096
Solaris 64-bit mode (versions 9, 10) 65536
Windows Server 2003, 2008 4096
Next Steps
Now that you have gained a general understanding of the roles and features
available with T-Servers, you are ready to learn how T-Servers are installed
and configured. That information is presented in the next few chapters of this
Deployment Guide. So unless you are already familiar with T-Server
deployment and operation procedures, continue with Chapter 2, “T-Server
General Deployment,” on page 29. Otherwise, you may want to jump to Part
Two of this Deployment Guide, where you will find information about your
specific T-Server.

Chapter 1: T-Server Fundamentals Next Steps
28 Framework 8.1
Chapter
2 T-Server General
Deployment
This chapter contains general information for the deployment, configuration,
and installation of your T-Server. You may have to complete additional
configuration and installation steps specific to your T-Server and switch. You
will find these steps in Part Two of this document.
This chapter contains these sections:

Prerequisites, page 29

Deployment Sequence, page 34
 Deployment of T-Server, page 34

Next Steps, page 41
Note: You must read the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide before
proceeding with this T-Server guide. That book contains information
about the Genesys software you must deploy before deploying
T-Server.
Prerequisites
T-Server has a number of prerequisites for deployment. Read through this
section before deploying your T-Server.
Software Requirements
Framework Components
You can only configure T-Server after you have deployed the Configuration
Layer of Genesys Framework. This layer contains DB Server, Configuration

Chapter 2: T-Server General Deployment Prerequisites
Server, and Configuration Manager. If you intend to monitor or control

T-Server through the Management Layer, you must also install and configure
components of this Framework layer, such as Local Control Agent (LCA),
Message Server, Solution Control Server (SCS), and Solution Control
Interface (SCI), before deploying T-Server.
Refer to the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide for information about, and
deployment instructions for, these Framework components.
Media Layer and LCA

To monitor the status of components in the Media Layer through the
Management Layer, you must load an instance of LCA on every host running
Media Layer components. Without LCA, Management Layer cannot monitor
the status of any of these components. If you do not use the Management
Layer, LCA is not required.
Supported Platforms
Refer to the Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference Manual for
the list of operating systems and database systems supported in Genesys
releases 6.x, 7.x, and 8.x. You can find this document on the Genesys
Technical Support website at
http://genesyslab.com/support/dl/retrieve/default.asp?item=B6C52FB6
2DB42BB229B02755A3D92054&view=item.
For UNIX-based (UNIX) operating systems, also review the list of patches
Genesys uses for software product builds, and upgrade your patch
configuration if necessary. A description of patch configuration is linked to
installation read_me.html files for the Genesys applications that operate on
UNIX, and is available within the installation packages.
Security
Starting with release 7.5, T-Server supports the Genesys Transport Layer
Security (TLS) and can be configured for secure data exchange with the other
Genesys components that support this functionality.
The Genesys TLS is not supported on all operating systems that T-Server itself
supports. For information about the supported operating systems, see the
Genesys 8.x Security Deployment Guide.
30 Framework 8.1
Hardware and Network Environment Requirements
Hosting
Genesys recommends that you or your IT specialist assign host computers to
Genesys software before you start Genesys installation. Remember the
following restrictions:
• Do not install all the Genesys server applications on the same host
computer.
• When installing a few server applications on the same host computer,
prevent them (except for Configuration Server) from using the swap area.
Installation Privileges
During deployment, be sure to log in with an account that will permit you to
perform administrative functions—that is, one that has root privileges.
Server Locations
Refer to the “Network Locations for Framework Components” chapter of the
Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide for recommendations on server locations.
Supported Platforms
Refer to the Genesys Supported Media Interfaces Reference Manual for the list
of supported switch and PBX versions. You can find this document on the
Genesys Technical Support website at
http://genesyslab.com/support/dl/retrieve/default.asp?item=A9CB309A
F4DEB8127C5640A3C32445A7&view=item.
Licensing Requirements
All Genesys software is licensed—that is, it is not shareware. Genesys
products are protected through legal license conditions as part of your purchase
contract. However, the level of technical license-control enforcement varies
across different solutions and components.
Before you begin to install T-Server, remember that, although you may not
have had to use technical licenses for your software when you deployed the
Configuration and Management Layers in their basic configurations, this is not
the case with the Media Layer.
T-Server requires seat-related DN technical licenses to operate even in its most
basic configuration. Without appropriate licenses, you cannot install and start
T-Server. If you have not already done so, Genesys recommends that you
install License Manager and configure a license file at this point. For complete

information on which products require what types of licenses, and on the

installation procedure for License Manager, refer to the Genesys Licensing
Guide available on the Genesys Documentation Library DVD.
The sections that follow briefly describe the T-Server license types.
Note: Starting with release 7.2, the licensing requirements for T-Server have
changed from previous releases. Please read this section carefully and
refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for complete licensing
information.
Licensing Basic Implementations

A stand-alone T-Server serving a single site requires licenses to register all
DNs it monitors. DNs that agents use in day-to-day contact center operations,
such as Extensions and ACD Positions, have to be registered using licenses
that control agent seats.
Note: Configure all seat DNs that agents use (Extensions and ACD Positions)
in the Configuration Layer. This enables detailed call monitoring
through Genesys reporting, and generally allows you to control access
to individual DNs.
Licensing HA Implementations
T-Servers operating with the hot standby redundancy type require a special
CTI HA technical license, which allows for high-availability implementations,
in addition to regular T-Server licenses. Neither T-Server in a redundant pair
configured for hot standby starts if this license is unavailable. Moreover, the
primary and backup T-Servers must use the same licenses to control the same
pool of DNs. If your T-Servers are configured with the hot standby redundancy
type, order licenses for CTI HA support.
Licensing Multi-Site Implementations

T-Servers performing multi-site operations require licenses that allow for such
operations, in addition to regular T-Server licenses. If some of your T-Servers
are configured for multi-site routing while others are not, either order licenses
for multi-site support for all T-Servers or install an additional License Manager
to handle the T-Servers involved in multi-site routing.
Note: You do not need licenses for multi-site support if some T-Server clients
include the local location as the location attribute value in their
requests for routing within the same site.
32 Framework 8.1
Configuring License Files

You need a license to configure and install Media Layer components. Genesys
recommends that, if you have not already done so, at this point you:
1. Install License Manager.
2. Configure license files.
Note: If you use the <port>@<server> format when entering the name of the
license server during installation, remember that some operating
systems use @ as a special character. In this case, the installation routine
is unable to write license information for T-Server to the Configuration
Layer or the run.sh file. Therefore, when you use the <port>@<server>
format, you must manually modify the command-line license
parameter after installing T-Server.
For information about which products require what types of licenses and for
the installation procedure for License Manager, refer to the Genesys Licensing
Guide available on the Genesys Documentation Library DVD.
About Configuration Options

Configuring T-Server is not a onetime operation. It is something you do at the
time of installation and then in an ongoing way to ensure the continued optimal
performance of your software. You must enter values for T-Server
configuration options on the Options tab of your T-Server Application object
in Configuration Manager. The instructions for configuring and installing
T-Server that you see here are only the most rudimentary parts of the process.
You must refer extensively to the configuration options chapters located in Part
Two of this book. Pay particular attention to the configuration options specific
to your own T-Server.
Configuration options common to all T-Servers, independent of switch type,
are described in Chapter 8, “T-Server Common Configuration Options,” on
page 153. T-Server-specific configuration options are described in a separate
chapter. T-Server also supports unified Genesys log options, as described in
the “Common Configuration Options” chapter.
Options that configure values for the TSCP software in your T-Server are
common to all T-Servers. Options based on the custom features of your switch
apply to your T-Server only. Familiarize yourself with both types of options.
You will want to adjust them to accommodate your production environment
and the business rules that you want implemented there.

Chapter 2: T-Server General Deployment Deployment Sequence
Deployment Sequence
This is the recommended sequence to follow when deploying T-Server.
Task Summary: T-Server Deployment Sequence
Objective Related Procedures and Actions
1. Deploy Configuration Layer objects See the Framework 8.1 Deployment

and ensure Configuration Manager Guide for details.
is running.
2. Deploy Network objects (such as See the Framework 8.1 Deployment

Host objects). Guide for details.
3. Deploy the Management Layer. See the Framework 8.1 Deployment

Guide for details.
4. Test your configuration and See Chapter 4, “Starting and Stopping

installation. T-Server Components,” on page 101.
Note: If, during the installation procedure for any of the Genesys
applications, the script warns you that Configuration Server is
unavailable and that the configuration cannot be updated, continue
with the installation. Following the installation, you must complete the
information on the Start Info tab to ensure that T-Server will run.
Deployment of T-Server
Deploying T-Server manually requires that you configure a number of
different objects in the Configuration Layer prior to setting up your T-Server
objects and then install T-Server. This section describes the manual
deployment process.
Configuration of Telephony Objects

This section describes how to manually configure T-Server telephony objects
if you are using Configuration Manager. For information about configuring
T-Server telephony objects using Genesys Administrator, refer to the
Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Help.
Recommendations
Genesys recommends registering (configuring) only those entities you plan to
use in the current configuration. The more data there is in the Configuration
34 Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: T-Server General Deployment Deployment of T-Server
Database, the longer it takes for the CTI setup to start, and the longer it will
take to process configuration data. Remember that adding configuration
objects to the Genesys Configuration Database does not cause any interruption
in contact center operation.
Depending on how much work is required to manually configure all
applications and objects, consider registering more Person objects first, with a
set of privileges that lets them perform configuration tasks.
Switching Offices
Your telephony network may contain many switching offices, but you should
only configure those that are involved with customer interactions.
Using Configuration Manager, be sure to register a Switching Office object
that accommodates your Switch object under Environment. Until you have
done this, you cannot register a Switch object under Resources (single-tenant
environment) or a Tenant (multi-tenant environment).
Note: The value for the switching office name must not have spaces in it.
Switches
1. Configure a Switch object for each switch on your telephony network.
Assign each Switch object to the appropriate T-Server Application
object.
2. If implementing the multi-site configuration, specify access codes for all
switches on the network so that the call-processing applications can route
and transfer calls between switches.
Two types of access codes exist in a Genesys configuration:
 Default access codes that specify how to reach this switch from any
other switch in the Genesys environment.

Switch-to-switch access codes that specify how to reach a particular
switch from any other switch. Use this type when either a nondefault
dial number or routing type is required between any two locations.
When a switch-to-switch access code is configured, its value has a
higher priority than that of a default access code.
See Chapter 3, “Multi-Site Support,” on page 43, for step-by-step
instructions.
Note: When the numbering plan uses unique directory number (DN)
assignment across sites and multi-site routing is not used, you do not
have to configure access codes.

DNs and Agent Logins
Note: Starting with release 7.2, the requirements for configuring DNs in the
Configuration Layer have changed. Refer to Part Two of this guide for
information about the requirements on configuring specific DN types
for your T-Server.
For each T-Server for which you are configuring DNs, you must configure all
DNs that agents and their supervisors use in day-to-day contact center
operation—so-called seat-related DNs—such as Extensions and ACD
Positions. Otherwise, T-Server does not register such DNs.
1. To configure Telephony objects within each switch, consult the switch
documentation. Information specific to your T-Server in Part Two of this
document contains tables that indicate how to set DN types in the Genesys
Configuration Database depending on the switch DN types and
configuration.
2. Check the numbering plan for different types of DNs, to see if you can
save time by registering Ranges of DNs. Usually, DNs of the same type
have consecutive numbers, which will make an otherwise tedious
configuration task easy. Agent Login objects almost always have
consecutive numbers, which means you can register them through the
Range of Agent Logins feature as well.
3. If you plan to use Virtual Queues and Virtual Routing Points in the contact
center operation, Genesys recommends registering them after you have
outlined the call-processing algorithms and identified your reporting needs.
Note: Remember that CTI applications, not the switch, generate

telephony events for DNs of these types.
Warning! When setting the Register flag for a DN, make sure you select the
value according to your T-Server. The Register flag values are as
follows:
• False—T-Server processes this DN locally, and never registers
it on the switch.
• True—T-Server always registers this DN on the switch during
T-Server startup or CTI link reconnect.
• On Demand—T-Server registers this DN on the switch only if a
T-Server client requests that it be registered.
Multi-Site Operations
See the section, “Configuring Multi-Site Support” on page 86, for information
on setting up DNs for multi-site operations.
36 Framework 8.1
Configuration of T-Server
Use the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide to prepare accurate configuration
information. You may also want to consult Configuration Manager Help
and/or Genesys Administrator Help, which contains detailed information about
configuring objects.
Recommendations
Genesys recommends using an Application Template when you are
configuring your T-Server application. The Application Template for your
particular T-Server contains the most important configuration options set to the
values recommended for the majority of environments. When modifying
configuration options for your T-Server application later in the process, you
can change the values inherited from the template rather than create all the
options by yourself.
Procedure:
Configuring T-Server
Start of procedure
1. Follow the standard procedure for configuring all Application objects to
begin configuring your T-Server Application object. Refer to the
Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide for instructions.
2. In a Multi-Tenant environment, specify the Tenant to which this T-Server
belongs on the General tab of the Properties dialog box.
3. On the Connections tab:
 Add all Genesys applications to which T-Server must connect.
Note: For multi-site deployments you should also specify T-Server

connections on the Connections tab for any T-Servers that may
transfer calls directly to each other.
4. On the Options tab, specify values for configuration options as appropriate

for your environment.
Note: For T-Server option descriptions, see Part Two of this document.

5. In a multi-site environment, you must complete additional T-Server

configuration steps to support multi-site operations; see Chapter 3,
“Multi-Site Support,” on page 43.
End of procedure
Next Steps
• See “Installation of T-Server” on page 38.
Procedure:
Configuring multiple ports
Purpose: To configure multiple ports in T-Server for its client connections.
Start of procedure
1. Open the T-Server Application Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Server Info tab.
3. In the Ports section, click Add Port.
4. In the Port Properties dialog box, on the Port Info tab:
a. In the Port ID text box, enter the port ID.
b. In the Communication Port text box, enter the number of the new port.
c. In the Connection Protocol box, select the connection protocol, if
necessary.
d. Select the Listening Mode option.
Note: For more information on configuring secure connections between

Framework components, see Genesys 8.x Security Deployment
Guide.
e. Click OK.
5. Click OK to save the new configuration.
End of procedure
Installation of T-Server
The following directories on the Genesys 8.1 Media product DVD contain
T-Server installation packages:
• media_layer/<switch>/<platform> for UNIX installations, where <switch>
is your switch name and <platform> is your operating system.
38 Framework 8.1
• media_layer\<switch>\windows for Windows installations, where <switch>

is your switch name.
Procedure:
Installing T-Server on UNIX
Note: During installation on UNIX, all files are copied into the directory you
specify. No additional directories are created within this directory.
Therefore, do not install different products into the same directory.
Start of procedure
1. In the directory to which the T-Server installation package was copied,
locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Run this script from the command prompt by typing sh and the file name.
For example: sh install.sh.
3. When prompted, confirm the host name of the computer on which
T-Server is to be installed.
4. When prompted, specify the host and port of Configuration Server.
5. When prompted, enter the user name and password to access Configuration
Server.
6. When prompted, select the T-Server application you configured in
“Configuring T-Server” on page 37 from the list of applications.
7. Specify the destination directory into which T-Server is to be installed,
with the full path to it.
8. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
• Type 1 to back up all the files in the directory (recommended).
• Type 2 to overwrite only the files in this installation package. Use this
option only if the installation being upgraded operates properly.
• Type 3 to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the
installation.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the
destination directory.
9. If asked which version of the product to install, the 32-bit or the 64-bit,
choose the one appropriate to your environment.
10. If asked about the license information that T-Server is to use: specify either
the full path to, and the name of, the license file, or the license server
parameters.

11. As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears

announcing that installation was successful. The process places T-Server in
the directory with the name specified during the installation.
End of procedure
Next Steps
• To verify manual installation, go to “Verifying the installation of T-Server”
on page 41.
• To test your configuration and installation, go to Chapter 4, “Starting and
Stopping T-Server Components,” on page 101, and try it out.
• To install T-Servers for a multi-site environment, proceed to Chapter 3,
Procedure:
Installing T-Server on Windows
Start of procedure
1. In the directory to which the T-Server installation package was copied,
locate and double-click Setup.exe to start the installation.
2. When prompted, specify the connection parameters to the Configuration
Server associated with this T-Server.
3. When prompted, select the T-Server Application you configured in
“Configuring T-Server” on page 37 from the list of applications.
4. Specify the license information that T-Server is to use: either the full path
to, and the name of, the license file, or the license server parameters.
5. Specify the destination directory into which T-Server is to be installed.
6. Click Install to begin the installation.
7. Click Finish to complete the installation.
By default, T-Server is installed as a Genesys service (Windows Services)
with Automatic startup type.
End of procedure
Next Steps
• To verify manual installation, go to “Verifying the installation of T-Server”
on page 41.
• To test your configuration and installation, go to Chapter 4, “Starting and
Stopping T-Server Components,” on page 101, and try it out.
40 Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: T-Server General Deployment Next Steps
• To install T-Servers for a multi-site environment, proceed to Chapter 3,

Procedure:
Verifying the installation of T-Server
Purpose: To verify the completeness of the manual installation of T-Server to

ensure that T-Server will run.
Prerequisites
• Procedure: Installing T-Server on UNIX, on page 39
• Procedure: Installing T-Server on Windows, on page 40
Start of procedure
1. Open the Properties dialog box for a corresponding Application object in
Configuration Manager.
2. Verify that the State Enabled check box on the General tab is selected.
3. Verify that the Working Directory, command-line, and Command-Line
Arguments are specified correctly on the Start Info tab.
4. Click Apply and OK to save any configuration updates.
End of procedure
Next Steps
At this point, you have configured and installed T-Server using Configuration
Manager. If you want to test your configuration and installation, go to
Chapter 4, “Starting and Stopping T-Server Components,” on page 101, and try
it out. If you want to install T-Servers for a multi-site environment, proceed to
Chapter 3, “Multi-Site Support,” on page 43.

Chapter 2: T-Server General Deployment Next Steps
42 Framework 8.1
Chapter
3 Multi-Site Support
This chapter contains general information about multi-site environments, as
well as information on deploying a multi-site environment for your T-Server.
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
 Multi-Site Fundamentals, page 44

ISCC Call Data Transfer Service, page 45

ISCC/Call Overflow Feature, page 65
 Number Translation Feature, page 69

Network Attended Transfer/Conference Feature, page 77

Event Propagation Feature, page 79
 ISCC Transaction Monitoring Feature, page 86

Configuring Multi-Site Support, page 86

Next Steps, page 100
Note: Each switch/T-Server combination offers different multi-site options.

For details describing your specific switch/T-Server environment,
refer to Chapter 8, “T-Server Common Configuration Options,” on
page 153.
The following instructions apply to both local and remote switches and
T-Servers. Because different vendor switches can be installed at the local and
remote locations, this chapter covers several, but not all, possible
configurations. To help determine which sections of this chapter apply to your
situation, refer to Table 3 on page 61 and Table 4 on page 66.
For more information on your specific switch/T-Server environment, refer to
the multi-site topics in Part Two of this guide.

Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Multi-Site Fundamentals
Multi-Site Fundamentals
A multi-site configuration has two or more switches that belong to the same
enterprise or service provider and that share the Genesys Configuration
Database. (In some cases, this may include isolated partitions on a given
switch served by different T-Servers.) The main goal of T-Server support for
multi-site operations is to maintain critical information about a call as it travels
from one switch to another.
T-Server supports multi-site operations using its Inter Server Call Control
(ISCC; formerly called External Routing), which supports the following
functions:
• Call matching—To link instances of a call distributed across multiple sites
and to re-attach essential data associated with the call (ConnID, UserData,
CallType, and CallHistory). The following T-Server features support this
capability:
 ISCC Call Data Transfer Service (active external routing)—when
requested by a T-Server client by specifying the desired destination in
the location parameter, and also with various ISCC strategies
performed by direct dial or by using the Transfer Connect Service. See
“ISCC Transaction Types” on page 52 and “Transfer Connect Service
Feature” on page 64.

Inter Server Call Control/Call Overflow (ISCC/COF) feature (passive
external routing)—applicable when calls are overflowed to another site
either directly or manually (see page 65).

Number Translation feature (see page 69).
 Network Attended Transfer/Conference (NAT/C) feature (see page 77).
Note: When ISCC detects call instance reappearance on a given site, the
call is assigned a unique ConnID and the user data is synchronized
with the previous call instances. This ensures that ConnIDs
assigned to different instances of the same call on a given site are
unique.
• Call data synchronization between associated call instances (ISCC

Event Propagation)—To provide the most current data to call instances
residing on remote T-Servers. The following T-Server features support this
capability:

User Data propagation (see page 80)
 Party Events propagation (see page 81)
Note: ISCC automatically detects topology loops and prevents

continuous updates.
44 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support ISCC Call Data Transfer Service
Note: In distributed networks, Genesys recommends using call flows that

prevent call topology loops and multiple reappearances of the same
call instance. This approach ensures that all T-Servers involved with
the call report the same ConnID, and also optimizes telephony trunk
allocation by preventing trunk tromboning.
The T-Server configuration contains information about other T-Servers with

which it will communicate. T-Server uses this information to connect with the
other T-Servers. During this “handshake” process, T-Servers exchange
information about the following parameters:
• Protocol type
• Switch type
• Server name
• Location name (switch name)
• T-Server role (primary or backup)
To complete the handshake process, T-Servers exchange messages about the
current condition of the links to their switches. After the handshake process is
complete, T-Server is ready to support a multi-site operation.
ISCC Call Data Transfer Service

Because ISCC supports active external routing, T-Servers that serve different
switches (usually on different sites) can exchange call data when a call is
passed from one switch to another. With this functionality, T-Server provides
its clients with the following additional information about each call received
from another switch:
• The connection identifier of the call (attribute ConnID).
• Updates to user data attached to the call at the previous site (attribute
UserData).
• The call type of the call (attribute CallType)—In multi-site environments
the CallType of the call may be different for each of its different legs. For
example, one T-Server may report a call as an Outbound or Consult call, but
on the receiving end this call may be reported as Inbound.
• The call history (attribute CallHistory)—Information about
transferring/routing of the call through a multi-site contact center network.
Note: Load-sharing IVR Servers and Network T-Servers cannot be

designated as the destination location for ISCC, except when
cast-type is set to dnis-pool. Consult the Universal Routing
Deployment Guide for specific configuration details.

Figure 5 shows the steps that occur during a typical external routing (ISCC)
transaction. Note that the location where a call is initially processed is called
the origination location, and the location to which the call is passed is called
the destination location.
Origination Origination Switch Destination

Destination Switch
Location Location
6. Call 7. Alerting event
Passing processing
5. Telephony
Request to
move a call to 3. Routing service
a destination availability check
location
2. Routing service
availability request
1. T-Library
T-Server T-Server
request 4. Routing service 9. Processing result
for ISCC availability response notification
routing 10. EventRemote-
Connection -
8. Call arrival
Success/Failure
processing
T-Server
Client
Figure 5: Steps in the ISCC Process
ISCC Call Flows

The following section identifies the steps (shown in Figure 5) that occur during
an ISCC transfer of a call.
Step 1
A client connected to the T-Server at the origination location requests this
T-Server to pass a call with call data to another location. For this purpose, the
client must specify the location parameter (Attribute Location) when calling a
corresponding T-Library function. ISCC processes the following T-Library
requests:
• TInitiateConference
• TInitiateTransfer
• TMakeCall
• TMuteTransfer
• TRouteCall
• TSingleStepTransfer
46 Framework 8.1
Step 2
Upon receiving a client’s request, the origination T-Server checks that the:
1. Connection to the destination T-Server is configured in the origination
T-Server Properties dialog box.
2. The connection to the destination T-Server is active.
3. The destination T-Server is connected to its link.
4. The origination T-Server is connected to its link.
If these four conditions are met, the origination T-Server determines the
transaction type that will be used for passing call data to another location in
this transaction. The following possibilities exist:
• The client can request what ISCC transaction type (or simply transaction
type) to use by specifying an appropriate key-value pair in the Extensions
attribute of the request. The key-value pair must have a key equal to
iscc-xaction-type and either an integer value as specified in the
TXRouteType enumeration (see the Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java)
API Reference) or a string value equal to one of the following: default,
route, direct (or direct-callid), direct-network-callid,
direct-notoken, direct-ani, direct-uui, direct-digits, reroute,
dnis-pool, pullback, or route-uui.
• If the client does not specify the transaction type in the request or specifies
the default transaction type, T-Server checks the Switch configuration for
the transaction type configured in the Access Code (or Default Access
Code) properties:
 If the Route Type property of the Access Code is set to any value other
than default, T-Server uses the specified value as the transaction type.

If the Route Type property of the Access Code is set to the default
value, T-Server uses the first value from the list specified in the
cast-type configuration option configured for the destination T-Server.
If no value has been specified for the cast-type option, the default
value of route is used as the transaction type.
Note: For more information on Access Codes and Default Access Code,
see “Switches and Access Codes” on page 88.
After the origination T-Server determines the requested transaction type, it

determines if the destination T-Server supports this transaction type.
You must list the transaction types T-Server supports in the cast-type
configuration option.
The origination T-Server issues a request for routing service availability and
sends it to the destination T-Server. The T-Server request contains data that
should be passed along with the call to the destination location. This data
includes the transaction type, ConnID, UserData, CallType, and CallHistory.

The timer specified by the request-tout configuration option is set when the
origination T-Server sends the request. If either the specified timeout expires
or the call is abandoned before the origination T-Server receives a response
from the destination T-Server, the operation is considered failed. In this
scenario, the origination T-Server:
1. Generates a request to the destination T-Server to cancel the request for
routing service.
2. Sends EventError to the client that requested the service.
3. Deletes information about the request.
Step 3
The destination T-Server receives the request for routing service availability
and checks the requested type of routing. Depending on the ISCC transaction
type, it stores the request information and, when appropriate, allocates access
resources for the coming call. For example, an External Routing Point is
allocated when the transaction type is route, and an Access Resource of type
dnis is allocated when the transaction type is dnis-pool.
Note: The resource-allocation-mode and resource-load-maximum

configuration options determine how resources are allocated. For
option descriptions, refer to Chapter 8, “T-Server Common
Configuration Options,” on page 153 for option descriptions.
If resources are unavailable, the request is queued at the destination location

until a resource is free or the origination T-Server cancels the request. If the
request is canceled, the destination T-Server deletes all information about the
request.
If resources are unavailable because of incorrect configuration, the destination
T-Server returns an error event to the origination T-Server.
Step 4
If resources are available, the destination T-Server generates a positive
response and the timer is started for the interval specified by the timeout
configuration option of the destination T-Server.
Step 5
If the origination T-Server receives a negative response, it sends an EventError
message to the client and clears all data about the request.
If the origination T-Server receives the confirmation about routing service
availability, it processes the client’s request and sends a corresponding
message to the switch. The timer on the origination T-Server is also started for
the interval specified by the timeout configuration option of the destination
T-Server.
48 Framework 8.1
Step 6
The origination switch processes the T-Server request and passes the call to the
destination switch.
Step 7
If the call arrives at the destination switch, the switch generates an alerting
event.
The destination T-Server waits for the call no longer than the interval specified
by the timeout configured on the destination T-Server. If the call is not
received at the destination location within this interval, the destination
T-Server issues a failure notification to the origination T-Server, deletes all
data about the request, and, when appropriate, frees the resources previously
allocated for the request.
If either the specified timeout expires or the call is abandoned before the
origination T-Server receives a response from the destination T-Server, the
operation is considered failed. In this case, the origination T-Server:
1. Generates a request to the destination T-Server to cancel the request for
routing service.
2. Responds to the client that requested the service in one of the following
ways:
If the origination T-Server has already sent a response to the request

the client sent in Step 1, the origination T-Server supplements its

response with EventRemoteConnectionFailed.
If the origination T-Server has not yet sent a response to the client, the

origination T-Server sends EventError.

3. Deletes information about the request.
Step 8
If the destination T-Server matches the arrived call, it updates the ConnID,
UserData, CallType, and CallHistory attributes with the data received in the
request for routing service availability. The connection ID is updated as
follows:
The arrived call is assigned the ConnID that is specified in the request for
routing service availability, but only if this ConnID does not coincide with the
ConnID of a call that has existed at the destination site. If two such ConnIDs are
identical, the arrived call is assigned a new unique ConnID.
For direct-* transaction types (where the asterisk stands for a callid, uui, ani,
or digits extension), the call reaches the destination DN directly.
For the transaction types route and route-uui, the call first arrives at an
External Routing Point from which it is routed to the destination DN. The call
info is updated when the call reaches the External Routing Point. An External

Routing Point is considered free when the first alerting event (EventQueued or
EventRouteRequest) is distributed.
Please keep the following issues in mind when using the ISCC feature:
• If routing from a dedicated External Routing Point to the destination DN
fails, T-Server considers the transaction failed. However, the ConnID,
UserData, CallType, and CallHistory attributes are updated. Then,
T-Server attempts to route the call to one of the Default DNs configured
for this External Routing Point.
• If the destination T-Server did not receive a request for routing service
availability, but a call arrives at an External Routing Point, T-Server
considers the call to be unexpected and routes the call to the DN specified
by the dn-for-unexpected-calls configuration option. When no alternative
targets are defined, the call remains at the External Routing Point until
diverted by the switch or abandoned by the caller.
For reroute and pullback transaction types, the call returns to the network
location. For the dnis-pool transaction type, the call reaches the destination
DN directly.
Step 9
If, in Step 8, the call does not arrive within the configured timeout, or the
transaction fails, the destination T-Server sends a notification of failure to the
origination T-Server.
Otherwise, the destination T-Server notifies the origination T-Server that the
routing service was successful and deletes all information about the request.
Step 10
The origination T-Server notifies the client that the routing service was
successful (or failed) and deletes all information about the request.
Client-Controlled ISCC Call Flow

The following section identifies the steps that occur during a client-controlled
ISCC transfer of a call.
Step 1
A client, such as Universal Routing Server (URS), that is connected to the
T-Server at the origination location detects a call to be delivered to another
destination location.
50 Framework 8.1
Step 2
The client chooses a destination location and the target DN for the call. Then, it
sends the TGetAccessNumber request to the destination T-Server for routing
service availability, indicating the target DN and other call context (ConnID,
UserData, and CallHistory attributes).
Step 3
The destination T-Server receives the request for routing service availability.
Depending on the ISCC transaction type, it stores the request information,
including the call context. When appropriate, it allocates access resources for
the coming call, such as External Routing Point.
If resources are unavailable, the request is queued at the destination T-Server
until an appropriate ISCC resource is free or the client cancels the request. If
the request is canceled, the destination T-Server deletes all information about
the request.
If resources are unavailable because of incorrect configuration, the destination
T-Server returns an EventError message to the client.
Step 4
The destination T-Server replies to the client with the
EventAnswerAccessNumber message, which contains the allocated ISCC
resource.
Step 5
The client requests that the origination T-Server delivers the call to the
destination location using the allocated access resource.
Step 6
The origination T-Server receives and processes the client’s request, and then
sends a corresponding message to the switch.
Step 7
The call arrives at the destination switch and is reported to the destination
T-Server via CTI. The call is matched by means of ISCC, based on the
specified cast-type setting and allocated resource, and then the call is assigned
a requested call context (such as ConnID or call data). Upon successful
transaction completion, the destination T-Server notifies the client by sending
EventRemoteConnectionSuccess.
The destination T-Server waits for the call no longer than the interval specified
by the timeout that is configured on the destination T-Server. If the call is not
received at the destination location within this interval, the destination
T-Server issues a failure notification to the client by sending

EventRemoteConnectionFailed, deletes all data about the request, and, when

appropriate, frees the resources previously allocated for the request.
The destination T-Server notifies the client whether the routing service
succeeded or failed by sending either the EventRemoteConnectionSuccess or
EventRemoteConnectionFailure, respectively.
ISCC Transaction Types

As switches of different types provide calls with different sets of information
parameters, a single mechanism for passing call data between the switches is
not feasible in some cases. Therefore, the ISCC feature supports a number of
mechanisms for passing call data along with calls between locations. This
section describes ISCC transaction type principles, identifies which transaction
types are supported for each T-Server, and defines each transaction type
(beginning with “direct-ani” on page 53).
It is important to distinguish the two roles that T-Servers play in an external
routing (ISCC) transaction—namely origination T-Server and destination
T-Server.
• The origination T-Server initiates an ISCC transaction. It prepares to send
the call to another T-Server and coordinates the process.
• The destination T-Server receives call data from an origination T-Server
and matches this data to a call that will arrive at some time in the future.
The distinction between these roles is important because the range of
telephony-hardware functionality often requires T-Servers to support two
entirely different sets of ISCC transactions based on which of the two roles
they play. For instance, it is very common for a particular T-Server to support
many types of ISCC transactions when it takes on the origination role, but
fewer when it takes on the role of a destination T-Server.
The ISCC transaction type reroute is a good example. Most T-Servers support
Reroute as origination T-Servers, but very few support Reroute as destination
T-Servers.
Determining and Configuring Transaction Type

Support
You can find descriptions of these transaction types starting on page 53. Use
Table 3 on page 61 to identify the transaction types your destination T-Server
supports. A blank table cell indicates that T-Server does not support a certain
transaction type.
You can configure the transaction types specific to your T-Server as values of
the cast-type configuration option specified in the ISCC configuration section
extrouter. Refer to Chapter 8, “T-Server Common Configuration Options,” on
page 153 for the option description.
52 Framework 8.1
ISCC Transaction Type General Principles

Generally, since most of the ISCC implementation is done at the T-Server
Common Part (TSCP) code level, all T-Servers support certain ISCC
transaction types. Any T-Server can act as the origination T-Server for the
following transaction types:
• direct-ani, page 53
• direct-notoken, page 55
• dnis-pool, page 56
• pullback, page 57
• reroute, page 58
• route (aliased as route-notoken), the default transaction type, page 59
The following transaction types are unevenly supported for both the
origination and destination T-Server roles:
• direct-callid (aliased as direct), page 54
• direct-digits (reserved for Genesys Engineering)
• direct-network-callid, page 54
• direct-uui, page 55
• route-uui, page 60
The reroute and pullback transaction types are supported only for selected
T-Servers in the destination role. However, if you implement this support,
other transaction types require additional configuration and testing—even
those that would normally be supported by default.
direct-ani
With the transaction type direct-ani, the ANI call attribute is taken as the
parameter for call matching. Properly configured switches and trunks can keep
the ANI attribute when a call is transferred over the network. T-Server can use
this network feature for call matching.

Warning! Depending on the switch platform, it may be possible to inherit

the ANI attribute after routing a call to a remote destination, and
after performing a single-step transfer and other telephone actions.
However, ISCC only works properly in scenarios where the ANI
attribute on the destination T-Server is represented by exactly the
same digit string as on the origination T-Server.
Typically, the ANI attribute represents the original call identifier
(customer phone number), which guarantees that the attribute
remains unique. However, you can use the non-unique-ani
resource type to block ISCC from matching calls based on an ANI
that is known to be non-unique. (See “Configuring access
resources for non-unique ANI” on page 97 for details.)
direct-callid
With the transaction type direct-callid, the call reaches the destination DN
directly from another location, and the CallID of the call is taken as the
attribute for call matching. When a call arrives at the final destination, the
destination T-Server identifies its CallID, and updates the call info if the
CallID matches.
Use this transaction type when the destination switch has the capability to
assign to an incoming call the same network-wide unique CallID that the
origination switch has already assigned to that call.
Notes: The direct-callid transaction type is used only in conjunction with

the TRouteCall and TSingleStepTransfer function calls. It is applied
only to the call that is in progress, and does not apply to functions
that involve in the creation of a new call, such as TMakeCall.
For T-Server for Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100, the
direct-callid transaction type is also applied to the TMuteTransfer
function.
direct-network-callid
With the transaction type direct-network-callid, the call reaches the
destination DN directly from another location, and the NetworkCallID of the
call is taken as the attribute for call matching. When a call arrives at the final
destination, the destination T-Server identifies its NetworkCallID, and updates
the call info if the NetworkCallID matches.
54 Framework 8.1
Use this transaction type when the destination switch has the capability to
assign to an incoming call the same network-wide unique NetworkCallID that
the origination switch has already assigned to that call.
Note: To support this transaction type, you must configure Target Type and
ISCC Protocol Parameters fields of the corresponding Switch Access
Code in the Configuration Layer. For information about settings that
are specific for your T-Server type, refer to Part Two of this document.
direct-uui
With the transaction type direct-uui, so-called user-to-user information (UUI)
is taken as the attribute for call matching. Some switches make it possible to
send a small data packet along with a call. T-Server can use this data to
recognize a call passed from one switch to another. The destination T-Server
generates a local unique value for UUI, and then notifies the origination
T-Server. The origination T-Server uses a provided value to mark the call
coming from the origination location. The destination T-Server receives a call
and checks whether it is marked with an exact UUI value. If so, the call is
considered to be matched.
On the Avaya Communication Manager and the Aspect ACD, UUI is referred
to as “user-to-user information.” On the Siemens Hicom 300 switch with
CallBridge, UUI is referred to as “Private User Data.” On the Alcatel
A4400/OXE switch, UUI is referred to as “correlator data.”
Note: To support this transaction type, you must configure your switches to
pass the UUI provided by your T-Server. You must also ensure that the
trunks involved do not drop this data.
direct-notoken
With the transaction type direct-notoken, T-Server expects a call to arrive
from another location to the destination DN specified in the request for routing
service availability. When a call reaches the specified DN, T-Server processes
the call as the expected externally-routed call.

Notes: This matching criterion is weak because any call that reaches the
specified DN is considered to be the expected call. Genesys
recommends that you use this transaction type only in a contact
center subdivision that can only be reached from within the contact
center (such as the second line of support, which customers cannot
contact directly).
When using direct transaction types, Network T-Servers and
load-sharing IVR Servers are not meant to act as destination
T-Servers for call routing. Using Network T-Server with these
transaction types requires special architecture.
dnis-pool
With the dnis-pool transaction type, T-Server reserves one of its DNIS access
resources and waits for the call that has the same DNIS attribute as the name of
the reserved DNIS access resource.
If the arrived call is matched successfully, the destination T-Server may update
the value of the DNIS attribute of the call (along with ConnID, UserData,
CallType, and CallHistory) with the value of the DNIS attribute of the original
call. This occurs when the value of the DNIS attribute of the original call is
specified as a value of the key-value pair _ISCC_TRACKING_NUMBER_ in the
Extensions attribute of the original client request.
The DNIS matching can be based on any number of digits out of all the digits
that comprise the DNIS attribute. The number of digits that T-Server should use
for DNIS matching is specified for the destination switch as the ISCC Protocol
Parameters property of the Switch Access Code. The value syntax should be as
follows:
dnis-tail=<number-of-digits>
For example, if this property is set to the dnis-tail=7 value, ISCC matches
only the last seven digits of a DNIS.
You must configure DNIS access resources in the switch; otherwise, ISCC
fails to use this transaction type and sends EventError in response to the client
application request.
Note: The dnis-pool transaction type is typically used for networks that
employ a “behind the SCP” architecture, such as network IVR.
Network T-Server for GenSpec and IServer are two examples of this,
but other Network T-Servers might also be used in this architecture.
56 Framework 8.1
In Load-Balancing Mode
When T-Server uses load balancing for call routing with the dnis-pool
transaction type, the following processes occur:
1. A client of the origination T-Server sends a request to pass a call to the
location with a DNIS access resource specified in the key-value pair
iscc-selected-dnis.
2. The origination T-Server distributes the request for a routing service to all
destination T-Servers.
3. The destination T-Servers receive the request and check that the specified
DNIS is not being used by another routing service request.
4. The origination T-Server expects to receive a positive response from each
destination T-Server. If the origination T-Server receives a negative
response from at least one T-Server, it sends an EventError to the client and
clears all data about the request. If the origination T-Server receives the
confirmation about routing service availability from all destination
T-Servers, it processes the client’s request and sends a corresponding
message to the switch.
5. The origination switch processes the T-Server request and passes the call
to the destination switch.
6. The call arrives at the destination switch, which generates an alerting event
to one of the corresponding load-balanced destination T-Servers.
7. That destination T-Server processes the call and notifies the origination
T-Server that the routing service was successful and deletes all information
about the request.
8. The origination T-Server sends a routing service request cancellation to all
other destination T-Servers.
9. The origination T-Server notifies the client that the routing service has
been successful and deletes all information about the request.
pullback
Pullback is used in the following scenario, for those T-Servers that support it:
1. A call arrives at Site A served by a Network T-Server.
2. At Site A, a Network T-Server client requests to pass the call by means of
ISCC routing to Site B served by a premise T-Server. Any transaction type
except reroute or pullback can be specified in this request.
3. The call arrives at Site B and is either answered by an agent or delivered to
a routing point.
4. A client of the premise T-Server at Site B sends a TRouteCall or
TSingleStepTransfer request to transfer the call to the network.

5. The Site B premise T-Server notifies the Network T-Server about this
request.
6. The network T-Server receives the notification and issues an
EventRouteRequest to obtain a new destination.
7. After receiving the new destination information, the Network T-Server
disconnects the call from its current premise location at Site B and attempts
to route the call to the new destination.
8. The Site B premise T-Server stops tracking the call, which has
disconnected from the premise’s agent DN or routing point and is delivered
to the network.
9. The network T-Server completes routing the call to its new destination.
Note: The transaction type pullback can only be used to return a call from a
premise T-Server to the Network T-Server that serves the site from
which the call was previously transferred.
reroute
Reroute is used in the following scenario, for those T-Servers that support it:
1. A call arrives at Site A served by a Network T-Server.
2. At Site A, a Network T-Server client requests to pass the call by means of
ISCC to Site B served by a premise T-Server. Any transaction type except
reroute or pullback can be specified in this request.
3. An agent at Site B answers the call.
4. A client of the premise T-Server at Site B sends a TSingleStepTransfer or
TRouteCall request to transfer the call elsewhere (to a PSTN, to an agent,
or to a routing point).
5. The Site B premise T-Server notifies the Network T-Server about this
request and releases the call leg that resides at the agent’s phone (using
TReleaseCall) or at the Routing Point (using TRouteCall with the parameter
RouteTypeCallDisconnect).
6. The Network T-Server receives the notification and reroutes the call to the
requested destination by sending EventRouteRequest and attaching the
call’s user data.
58 Framework 8.1
Notes: The transaction type reroute can only be used to return a call from a
premise T-Server to the Network T-Server that serves the site from
which the call was previously transferred.
To perform multi-site operations that are initiated with TRouteCall
and for which the reroute transaction type is requested, the
origination T-Server must support the RouteTypeCallDisconnect
subtype of TRouteCall.
route
With the transaction type route (aliased as route-notoken), a call from the
origination location reaches a dedicated External Routing Point, and from
there, it is routed to a destination DN.
To control configured External Routing Points, T-Server must register these
DNs with the switch. Failure to register implies that the External Routing Point
is not available for ISCC purposes. Client applications can register External
Routing Points via T-Server for monitoring purposes only.
Point-to-Point (One-to-One)
In the Point-to-Point access mode, only one trunk line is used to access an
External Routing Point (for example, VDN, CDN) at the destination site. See
Figure 6.
Trunk Line 1
External Routing Point 1
Trunk Line 2
Trunk Line 3
Figure 6: Point-to-Point Trunk Configuration
Note: Dedicated DNs of the External Routing Point type must be configured
in a switch. See “Configuring Multi-Site Support” on page 86.
Multiple-to-Point (Multiple-to-One)
In the Multiple-to-Point access mode, trunk lines are assigned to the
destination switch’s trunk group, from which calls are routed to the final
destination. See Figure 7.

Trunk Line 1
Trunk Line 2
External Routing Point
Trunk Line 3
Figure 7: Multiple-to-Point Trunk Configuration
With this configuration, all calls reach the same External Routing Point. The
DNIS attribute of a specific call differs from that of other calls and uniquely
identifies the trunk from which the call arrived.
Note: To switch to this operating mode, you must configure the route-dn
configuration option for T-Server.
route-uui
The route-uui transaction type employs the dedicated External Routing Point
feature of the route transaction type (page 59) and the UUI matching feature of
the direct-uui transaction type (page 55). This transaction type accommodates
those switches that require a designated External Routing Point even though
they use UUI for tracking.
Note: To support this transaction type, you must configure your switches to
pass the UUI provided by your T-Server. You must also ensure that
the trunks involved do not drop this data.
T-Server Transaction Type Support

Table 3 shows which transaction types are supported by a specific T-Server.
Use this table to determine the transaction types that are available for use with
your T-Server. This applies both to the cast-type you specify in the
configuration options for your T-Server, and to any client-designated
route-type requests specified for transfers of calls. A blank table cell indicates
that T-Server does not support a certain transaction type.
60 Framework 8.1
Table 3: T-Server Support of Transaction Types
T-Server Transaction Type

Type
route redirect- direct- direct- direct- direct- direct- dnis- pull-
route callid uui / no- ani digits network- pool back
one-to- multiple- route- token callid
one to-one uui
Aastra Yes Yesa Yes Yesa

MXONE
CSTA I
Alcatel Yes Yes Yes Yes

A4200/OXO
Alcatel Yes Yesa,b,c Yesd Yes Yesa Yese

A4400/OXE
Aspect ACD Yes Yes Yesc Yesf Yesf
Avaya Yes Yes Yes Yes

Communica-
tion Manager
Avaya INDeX Yes Yes Yesb
Avaya TSAPI Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cisco UCCE Yes Yes Yes
Cisco Unified Yes Yes Yes Yes

Communica-
tions Manager
DataVoice Yes Yes Yes Yes

Dharma
Digitro Yes Yes Yes

AXS/20
EADS Intecom Yes Yes Yes Yes

M6880
EADS Yes Yes Yes Yes

Telecom
M6500
eOn eQueue Yes Yes Yes
Fujitsu F9600 Yes Yes

Table 3: T-Server Support of Transaction Types (Continued)

Type
one to-one uui
Huawei Yes Yes

C&C08
Huawei NGN Yes Yes Yes
Mitel MiTAI Yes Yes Yes Yesg
NEC Yes Yes Yes Yes

NEAX/APEX
Nortel Yes Yesf Yesf Yesf

Communica-
tion Server
2000/2100
Nortel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Communica-
tion Server
1000 with
SCCS/MLS
Philips Sopho Yes Yes Yes Yes

iS3000
Radvision Yes Yes Yes

iContact
Samsung Yes Yes Yes

IP-PCX IAP
Siemens Yes Yes Yesd Yes Yes

Hicom
300/HiPath
4000 CSTA I
Siemens Yes Yes Yes

HiPath 3000
Siemens Yes Yesd Yes Yes

HiPath 4000
CSTA III
62 Framework 8.1

Type
one to-one uui
Siemens Yes Yesh Yes Yesi

HiPath DX
SIP Server Yes Yes Yesj Yes Yes
Spectrum Yes Yes Yes Yesf Yesf
Tadiran Coral Yes Yes Yes Yes
Teltronics Yes Yes Yes Yes

20-20
Tenovis Yes Yes Yes Yes

Integral 33/55
Network T-Servers
AT&T
Concert
CRSP Yes
DTAG Yes
GenSpec Yes Yes Yes Yes
IVR Server, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

using network
configuration
KPN Yes
ISCP
MCI
NGSN Yes Yes Yes
Network SIP Yes Yes Yes Yes

Server
Sprint Yes


Type
one to-one uui
SR-3511
Stentor
a. Not supported in the case of function TRouteCall on a Virtual Routing Point: a Routing Point can be simulated
using a hunt group with calls being deflected or transferred from the hunt-group member when routing. When a
two-step (typically mute) transfer is used on such a hunt-group member, CallID and ANI usually change; thus, the
direct-callid and direct-ani types do not work.
b. Not supported in the case of function TSingleStepTransfer when the T-Server service is simulated using a
two-step transfer to the switch. In this case, CallID and ANI change; thus, the direct-callid and direct-ani types
do not work.
c. Not supported if two T-Servers are connected to different nodes.
d. There are some switch-specific limitations when assigning CSTA correlator data UUI to a call.
e. Supported only on ABCF trunks (Alcatel internal network).
f. To use this transaction type, you must select the Use Override check box on the Advanced tab of the DN
Properties dialog box.
g. Supported only for TRouteCall requests made from a Native Routing Point.
h. Not supported if a TMakeCall request is made.
i. Not supported if a TInitiateTransfer or TInitiateConference request is made from an outgoing call on
a device.
j. SIP Server supports the direct-uui type.
Transfer Connect Service Feature

The Transfer Connect Service (TCS) feature supports transfer connect services
available on some telephony networks. When this feature is enabled, ISCC
passes user data to remote locations to which calls are transferred or
conferenced using transfer connect services.
64 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support ISCC/Call Overflow Feature
Procedure:
Activating Transfer Connect Service
Start of procedure
1. Open the T-Server Application’s Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. Set the tcs-use configuration option to always.
4. Set the tcs-queue configuration option to the number of a DN on the
origination switch.
ISCC uses this DN as an intermediate step when sending calls to the
remote location. The DN that is configured as tcs-queue receives attached
data indicating the Feature Access Code (FAC) needed to reach the remote
site. After a call is directed to the DN with data, a monitoring application
takes the data and generates the required DTMF (dual-tone
multifrequency) tones to redirect the call through the network to the remote
location.
5. When you are finished, click Apply.
6. Click OK to save your changes and exit the Properties dialog box.
End of procedure
Note: With T-Server for Avaya Communication Manager, you can use
RequestRouteCall with RouteTypeOverwriteDNIS to initiate the playing
of DTMF tones. This is done through the use of another intermediate
DN (typically, an announcement port configured to give the silent
treatment), to which the call is routed. When the call is established on
this DN, T-Server requests that the digits sent in the DNIS field of the
TRequestRouteCall be played by using the ASAI-send-DTMF-single
procedure.
ISCC/Call Overflow Feature

The Inter Server Call Control/Call Overflow (ISCC/COF) feature of T-Server,
that supports passive external routing, is specifically designed to handle calls
delivered between sites without an explicitly defined destination location. Such
scenarios include contact center overflows and manual call transfers.
An overflow situation occurs when a call comes into a contact center where all
agents are currently busy. In this situation, the switch can transfer (overflow)
the incoming call to another site where there is an available agent.

T-Server uses two methods to handle call overflow and manual transfer
scenarios. The first method is based on NetworkCallID matching and the second
method is based on ANI/OtherDN matching.
When connected to each other via switch-specific networks, switches of some
types can pass additional information along with transferred calls. This
information may contain the NetworkCallID of a call, which is a networkwide
unique identifier of the call.
When connected via a regular PSTN, switches of all types can send the ANI
and/or OtherDN attributes to the destination switch during any call transfer
operation.
While all T-Servers support the ISCC/COF feature using the ANI and/or
OtherDN attributes, only a few support this feature using the NetworkCallID
attribute. Table 4 shows the T-Server types that provide the NetworkCallID of a
call.
Table 4: T-Server Support of NetworkCallID for ISCC/COF Feature
T-Server Type Supported NetworkCallID

Attribute
Alcatel A4400/OXEa Yes
Aspect ACD Yes
Avaya Communication Managera,b Yes
Avaya TSAPIa,b Yes
Cisco UCCE Yes
Mitel MiTAIa Yes
Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100a Yes
Nortel Communication Server 1000 with Yes

SCCS/MLSa
SIP Servera Yes
Spectrum Yes
a. Supported only if the match-flexible configuration parameter is used.

b. ISCC/COF is cross-compatible between T-Server for Avaya Communication Man-
ager and T-Server for Avaya TSAPI.
The ISCC/COF feature can use any of the three attributes (NetworkCallID,
ANI, or OtherDN) as criteria for matching the arriving call with an existing call
at another location. Consequently, the attribute that is used determines what
66 Framework 8.1
ConnID, UserData, CallType, and CallHistory are received for the matched
call from the call’s previous location.
Warning! Depending on the switch platform, it may be possible to inherit

the ANI attribute after routing a call to a remote destination, and
after performing a single-step transfer and other telephone actions.
However, ISCC/COF works properly only in scenarios where the
ANI attribute on the destination T-Server is represented by exactly
the same unique digit string as on the origination T-Server.
Typically, the ANI attribute represents the original call identifier
(customer phone number), which guarantees that the attribute
remains unique.
Note: When the ISCC/COF feature is in use, the Number Translation feature
becomes active. For more information on feature configuration, see
“Number Translation Feature” on page 69.
ISCC/COF Call Flow

Figure 8 shows the sequence of steps that occur in an ISCC/COF scenario
when a call is made or transferred by an agent at Site A to a DN at Site B, or
when a call is overflowed from Site A to Site B.
Site A Origination Switch Destination Switch Site B
2. Call
passing
Agent
1. Call made/
transferred to
another location
3. Arrived call
notification
4. Call data
request 8. Event
distribution T-Server
T-Server T-Server Client
6. Call data
passing 5. Call data waiting
7. Call data update
9. Info clearing
Figure 8: Steps in the ISCC/COF Process
Step 1
An agent makes or transfers a call manually to another location or a call is
overflowed from Site A (origination location) to Site B (destination location).

Step 2
Switch A (the origination switch) passes the call to Switch B (the destination
switch).
Step 3
The call reaches the destination switch, which notifies the destination T-Server
about the arrived call.
Step 4
The destination T-Server verifies with remote locations whether the call
overflowed at any of them.
To determine which calls to check as possibly having overflowed, T-Server
relies on the Switch object and the presence of DNs on the Switch configured
as the Access Resource type with the Resource Type set either to cof-in
(COF-IN DNs) or to cof-not-in (COF-NOT-IN DNs):
T-Server skips an arriving call when one of following conditions is met:
• The call arrives at a DN configured as an Enabled COF-NOT-IN DN.
• COF-IN DNs are configured, but the call arrives at a DN other than one of
the configured COF-IN DNs or to a COF-IN DN which is Disabled.
In all other cases, the call is checked for overflow.
To determine which location the call arrived from, T-Server checks the call
type and checks whether the call has the NetworkCallID, ANI, or OtherDN
attribute:
• If the call is not an inbound call, the request for call data is sent to all
remote locations except those whose Switch Access Code has the ISCC
Call Overflow Parameters property set to inbound-only=true.
• If the call of any type has the NetworkCallID attribute, the destination
T-Server sends a request for call data to the remote locations of the same
switch type as the destination location if their Switch Access Codes have
the ISCC Call Overflow Parameters property set to match-callid.
• If the call of any type has the ANI or OtherDN attribute, the request for call
data is sent to remote locations whose Switch Access Code has the ISCC
Call Overflow Parameters property set to match-ani.
Step 5
The destination T-Server waits (suspending events related to that call) for the
call data from the remote T-Server for the time interval specified in the
cof-ci-req-tout configuration option. Within this interval, T-Server holds any
events related to the call. In addition, the cof-ci-defer-delete option on the
origination T-Server establishes the time interval only after which that
T-Server deletes the call information. And the cof-ci-wait-all, if set to true,
68 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Number Translation Feature
forces the origination T-Server to wait for responses related to possible call
overflow situations before updating call data.
Step 6
The T-Server at the location from which the call was transferred or overflowed
sends call data to the requesting T-Server.
Step 7
If a positive response to the call-data request is received, T-Server updates
ConnID, UserData, CallType, and CallHistory, distributes all suspended
events related to that call, and deletes all information regarding the transaction
(Step 9).
Step 8
If the timeout set by cof-ci-req-tout expires, T-Server distributes all
suspended events, and starts the timeout specified by the cof-rci-tout option.
If a positive response is received within the timeout set by cof-rci-tout,
T-Server updates the ConnID, UserData, CallType, and CallHistory, and
notifies client applications by distributing EventPartyChanged.
Step 9
T-Server deletes all information regarding the transaction when one of these
results occurs:
• The first positive response to the call-data request is received.
• Negative responses from all queried locations are received.
• The timeout specified by the cof-rci-tout option expires.
Number Translation Feature

The Number Translation feature of T-Server extends the ISCC/COF and
direct-ani transaction type functions to provide more flexibility for handling
calls distributed across multiple sites. T-Server translates the input string (ANI
string) into a number defined by the translation rules. This processing is called
number translation. T-Servers participating in handling calls at multiple sites
exchange the translated numbers in order to match the call instances.
The translation process involves two algorithms, one for rule selection and the
other for the actual translation. Through the first algorithm, T-Server selects a
rule that will be used for number translation. Through the second algorithm,
T-Server translates the number according to the selected rule definition. See
“Number Translation Rules” on page 70 for more information on configuring
rules for your environment.

Number translation occurs as follows:

1. The switch reports a number, typically via AttributeANI.
2. T-Server evaluates all configured inbound rules to determine which one is
the best fit for the received number. The best fit is determined by
comparing the length of, and the specific digits in, the input number with
the inbound pattern of each configured rule. See “Rule Examples” on
page 75 for specific examples.
3. T-Server translates the number according to the selected rule.
To enable T-Server to translate numbers, you must perform specific
configuration tasks that are associated with translation. See “Configuring
Number Translation” on page 77.
Number Translation Rules

T-Server uses the number translation rules that you define in the T-Server
configuration object in two ways:
• Rule selection—To determine which rule should be used for number
translation
• Number translation—To transform the number according to the selected
rule
Using ABNF for Rules

The number translation rules must conform to the following syntax,
represented using Augmented Backus-Naur Form (ABNF) notation. For more
information about ABNF, see RFC 2234, “Augmented BNF for Syntax
Specifications: ABNF.”
Note: The following notation explanations begin with the highest level
notation. Each explanation includes the name of a component notation
and a basic definition of each component that it contains. Some
components require more detailed definitions, which are included
later in this section.
Common Syntax Notations

Syntax notations common to many of these rules include:
• *—Indicates that 0 to an infinite number of the item following this symbol
are acceptable.
• 1*—Indicates that one repetition is required. For T-Server, only one
instance is acceptable.
• /—Indicates that any of the items mentioned, or a combination of those
items, is acceptable.
70 Framework 8.1
Component Notations
Component notations include:
• dialing-plan = *dialing-plan-rule
where:

dialing-plan-rule represents the name of the rule. Each rule must
have a unique name. There are no other naming restrictions, and you
do not need to model your names according to the examples in this
chapter.
The rules are represented as separate options in the configuration. Also,
fields from a rule are represented as parameters in a single option string.
• rule = [name] in-pattern [out-pattern]
where:

[name] is the name for the rule option, for example, rule-01. In ABNF
notation, the brackets [] indicate that 0 or 1 instance of the component
is required. However, for T-Server, a name is required.

in-pattern is the part of the rule to which T-Server looks when
attempting to match the input number.
 [out-pattern] is the part of the rule that instructs T-Server on how to
translate the input number into the required format. The brackets
indicate that either 0 or 1 instance is required. You must create an
out-pattern for number translation rules.
• name = *( ALPHA / DIGIT / "-")
where:

ALPHA indicates that letters can be used in the name for the rule option.
 DIGIT indicates that numbers can be used in the name for the rule
option.

“-” indicates that a dash (-) can also be used in the option name, for
example, rule-01.
• in-pattern = 1*(digit-part / abstract-group)
where:

digit-part represents numbers. T-Server uses this when selecting the
most appropriate rule from the entire dialing plan.

abstract-group represents one or more letters with each letter
representing one or more numbers. T-Server uses this when
transforming a dial string.
For example, [1-9] is the digit-part (representing a range of numbers)
and ABBB is the abstract-group for in-pattern=[1-9]ABBB.
• out-pattern = 1*(symbol-part / group-identifier) *param-part
where:

symbol-part represents digits, symbols, or a combination. Symbols are
rarely used. They are not used in the United States.


group-identifier are letters that represent groups of numbers. A letter
in the out-pattern represents one or more digits, based on the number
of times the letter is used in the in-pattern.

*param-part represents an additional parameter, such as
phone-context. Reminder: an asterisk means that 0 to an infinite
number of these are acceptable.
For example, in rule-04; in-pattern=1AAABBBCCC;out-pattern=91ABC, 91
is the symbol-part; A, B, and C are group-identifiers in the out-pattern,
each representing three digits, since there are three instances of each in the
in-pattern.
Note: Prefix an out-pattern value with a plus sign (+) for the inbound
rule when the output must be in a global form (E.164 format).
• digit-part = digits / range / sequence

where:

digits are numbers 0 through 9.
 range is a series of digits, for example, 1-3.

sequence is a set of digits.
• symbol-part = digits / symbols
where:
 digits are numbers 0 through 9.

symbols include such characters as +, -, and so on.
• range = "[" digits "-" digits "]" group-identifier
where:
 "[" digits "-" digits "]" represents the numeric range, for
example, [1-2].

group-identifier represents the group to which the number range is
applied.
For example, [1-2] applies to group identifier A for
in-pattern=[1-2]ABBB. When T-Server evaluates the rule to determine
if it matches the number, it examines whether the first digit of the
number, identified as group-identifier A, is 1 or 2.
• sequence = "[" 1*(digits [","] ) "]" group-identifier
where:
 "[" 1*(digits [","] ) "]" represents a sequence of digits, separated
by commas, and bracketed. T-Server requires that each digit set have
the same number of digits. For example, in [415,650] the sets have
three digits.
 group-identifier represents the group to which the number sequence
is applied.
72 Framework 8.1
For example, in in-pattern=1[415,650]A*B, [415,650] applies to

group-identifier A. When T-Server evaluates the rule to determine if it
matches the number, it examines whether the three digits
(group-identifier A) following the 1 in the number are 415 or 650.
• abstract-group = fixed-length-group / flexible-length-group / entity
where:

fixed-length-group specifies a group composed of a specific number
of digits and determined by how many times the group identifier is
included in the in-pattern. For example, for in-pattern=1AAABBBCCCC,
there are three digits in group A and B but four in group C.
When you create an out-pattern, you include the group identifier only
once because the in-pattern tells T-Server how many digits belong in
that group. For example, rule-04 (see page 75) is
in-pattern=1AAABBBCCCC; out-pattern=91ABC.

flexible-length-group specifies a group composed of 0 or more digits
in the group represented by the group-identifier. For example, in
in-pattern=1[415,650]A*B, *B represents the flexible length group
containing the remaining digits in the number.

entity represents digits defined for a specific purpose, for example,
country code.
The component abstract-group is used only for the in-pattern.
• fixed-length-group = 1*group-identifier
See the earlier explanation under abstract-group.
• flexible-length-group = “*” group-identifier
See the earlier explanation under abstract-group.
• entity = “#” entity-identifier group-identifier
where:
 “#” indicates the start of a Country Code entity-identifier.
 entity-identifier must be the letter C which represents Country Code
when preceded by a pound symbol (#). Any other letter following the #
causes an error.

group-identifier represents the Country Code group when preceded
by #C.
The entity component is a special group that assumes some kind of
predefined processing, such as the Country Code detection.
• param-part = “;” param-name “=” param-value
where:
 “;” is a required separator element.
 param-name is the name of the parameter.

“=” is the next required element.
• param-value represents the value for param-name.

• param-name = “ext” / “phone-context” / “dn”

where:

“ext” refers to extension.

“phone-context” represents the value of the phone-context option
configured on the switch.

“dn” represents the directory number.
• param-value = 1*ANYSYMBOL
where:

ANYSYMBOL represents any number, letter, or symbol with no restrictions.
• group-identifier = ALPHA
• entity-identifier = ALPHA
• digits = 1*DIGIT
• symbols = 1*(“-” / “+” / “)” / “(“/ “.”)
Recommendations for Rule Configuration

The configuration of rules for inbound numbers usually depends on the
settings in the corresponding PBX. These settings often define the form in
which the PBX notifies its client applications about the number from which an
inbound call is coming.
As a general guideline, configure rules that define how to process calls from:
• Internal numbers.
• External numbers within the same local dialing area.
• External numbers within the same country.
• International numbers.
Rules for inbound numbers, typically for North American locations, might
look like this:
1. Two rules to transform internal numbers (extensions):
name=rule-01;in-pattern=[1-9]ABBB;out-pattern=AB
name=rule-02;in-pattern=[1-9]ABBBB;out-pattern=AB
2. A rule to transform local area code numbers (in 333-1234 format in this
example):
name=rule-03;in-pattern=[1-9]ABBBBBB;out-pattern=+1222AB
3. A rule to transform U.S. numbers (in +1(222)333-4444 format):
name=rule-04;in-pattern=1AAAAAAAAAA;out-pattern=+1A
4. A rule to transform U.S. numbers without the +1 prefix (in (222)333-4444
format):
name=rule-05;in-pattern=[2-9]ABBBBBBBBB;out-pattern=+1AB
74 Framework 8.1
5. A rule to transform U.S. numbers with an outside prefix (in 9

+1(222)333-4444 format):
name=rule-06;in-pattern=91AAAAAAAAAA;out-pattern=+1A
6. A rule to transform international numbers with an IDD (international
dialing digits) prefix (in 011 +44(111)222-3333 format):
name=rule-07;in-pattern=011*A;out-pattern=+A
7. A rule to transform international numbers without an IDD prefix (in
+44(111)222-3333 format):
name=rule-08;in-pattern=[2-9]A*B;out-pattern=+AB
Rule Examples
This section provides examples of six rules that are configured as options in
the Genesys Configuration Database. It also provides examples of how
T-Server applies rules to various input numbers.
Rules
rule-01 in-pattern=[1-8]ABBB;out-pattern=AB
rule-02 in-pattern=AAAA;out-pattern=A
rule-03 in-pattern=1[415,650]A*B;out-pattern=B
rule-04 in-pattern=1AAABBBCCCC;out-pattern=91ABC
rule-05 in-pattern=*A913BBBB;out-pattern=80407913B
rule-06 in-pattern=011#CA*B;out-pattern=9011AB
Examples
Here are examples of how T-Server applies configured above rules to various
input numbers.
Example 1 T-Server receives input number 2326.
As a result of the rule selection process, T-Server determines that the matching
rule is rule-01:
name=rule-01;in-pattern=[1-8]ABBB;out-pattern=AB
The matching count for this rule is 1, because Group A matches the digit 2.
As a result of the parsing process, T-Server detects two groups: Group A = 2
and Group B = 326.
T-Server formats the output string as 2326.
rule is rule-02:
name=rule-02;in-pattern=AAAA;out-pattern=A

The matching count for this rule is 0; however, the overall length of the input
number matches that of the in-pattern configuration.
As a result of the parsing process, T-Server detects one group: Group A =
9122.
rule is rule-03:
name=rule-03;in-pattern=1[415,650]A*B;out-pattern=B
The matching count for this rule is 4, because the first digit matches and all
three digits in Group A match.
and Group B = 3222332.
rule is rule-04:
name=rule-04;in-pattern=1AAABBBCCCC;out-pattern=91ABC
The matching count for this rule is 1, because the first digit matches.
As a result of parsing process, T-Server detects three groups: Group A = 925,
Group B = 322, and Group C = 7676.
As a result of rule selection process, T-Server determines that the matching
rule is rule-05:
name=rule-05;in-pattern=*A913BBBB;out-pattern=80407913B
The matching count for this rule is 3, because three digits match.
and Group B = 7676.
rule is rule-06:
name=rule-06;in-pattern=011#CA*B;out-pattern=9011AB
The matching count for this rule is 3, because three digits match.
and Group B = 1112223333.
76 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Network Attended Transfer/Conference Feature
Procedure:
Configuring Number Translation
Purpose: To configure the Number Translation feature in T-Server to provide

more flexibility for handling calls distributed across multiple sites.
Overview
• The Number Translation feature becomes active when the ISCC/COF
feature and/or the direct-ani transaction type are used.
• This configuration procedure must be completed within the T-Server
Application object corresponding to your T-Server.
Start of procedure
3. Create a new section called extrouter or open an existing section with this
name.
4. Create a new option called inbound-translator-<n>. This option points to
another section that describes the translation rules for inbound numbers.
5. In this section, create one configuration option for each rule. Specify the
rule name as the option name. The values of these options are the rules for
the number translation.
For the option description and its valid values, see Chapter 8, “T-Server
Common Configuration Options,” on page 153.
End of procedure
Network Attended
Transfer/Conference Feature
The Network Attended Transfer/Conference (NAT/C) feature is designed to
enable agents working in multi-site contact centers to consult with each other
before making call transfers or conferences, regardless of whether both agents
work at the same or different sites. It also enables the agent who requests a
consultation to maintain his or her conversation with the customer while the
system is looking for an available agent and setting up the consultation call.

Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Network Attended Transfer/Conference Feature
The NAT/C feature does not rely on the call transfer capabilities of the local
switch.
There are two modes in which the network attended transfer/conference can be
performed: direct and URS-controlled. Figure 9 shows the sequence of steps
that occur in URS-controlled mode, when Agent A, who is handling a customer
call, requests a consultation with another agent, and URS (Universal Routing
Server) selects Agent B, who is working at another site. The direct mode is
similar to the URS-controlled mode, with the difference that URS is not
involved in the process (Step 2 and Step 3 are omitted).
SCP URS
5. Consultation 2. EventRoute- 3. Routing call to

request and Request Agent B
confirmation
Network T-Server 4. Call data

passing
Site A Site B
T-Server A T-Server B
6. Consultation
1. TNetworkConsult
with Agent B
request
Agent A Switch A Switch B Agent B
Figure 9: Steps in the NAT/C Process in URS-Controlled Mode
Step 1
Agent A makes a request for a consultation with another agent. A
TNetworkConsult request is relayed to the Network T-Server. Depending on the
parameter settings of the TNetworkConsult request, the NAT/C feature will
operate in either direct or URS-controlled mode. For more information, see the
Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API Reference.
Step 2
(URS-controlled mode only.) The Network T-Server sends EventRouteRequest
to URS.
Step 3
(URS-controlled mode only.) URS locates an available agent at Site B and
instructs the Network T-Server to route the call to Agent B. The Network
78 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Event Propagation Feature
T-Server confirms the initiation of the network transfer by sending

EventNetworkCallStatus to T-Server A, which then relays it to Agent A.
Step 4
The Network T-Server proceeds to obtain the access number from T-Server B,
and passes the call data to T-Server B. (See “ISCC Call Data Transfer Service”
on page 45 for details.)
Step 5
The Network T-Server instructs the Service Control Point (SCP) to initiate a
new voice path with Agent B. Once the connection is confirmed, the Network
T-Server distributes EventNetworkCallStatus to both T-Server A and T-Server
B, which then relay it to Agent A and Agent B respectively, to indicate that the
consultation call is being established.
The Network T-Server also distributes EventRouteUsed to URS to confirm
successful routing of the call to the selected agent.
Step 6
At this point, the customer is on hold, and Agent A is consulting with Agent B.
Agent A can do one of the following:
• End the consultation and retrieve the original customer call
• Alternate between Agent B and the customer
• Set up a conference call with Agent B and the customer
• Transfer the customer call to Agent B
Note: All T-Servers support NAT/C requests with AttributeHomeLocation

provided that this attribute identifies a network location that is capable
of processing such requests. Refer to the Network T-Server
Deployment Guides to determine whether a specific Network T-Server
can process these requests.
Event Propagation Feature

The Event Propagation feature complements the ISCC and ISCC/COF features
by distributing updated user data and party-related events to remote T-Servers.
This feature is used when a call is being made, transferred, or conferenced to
another location, and when, as a result, one or more instances of the call reside
at one location while other call instances reside at another location. In this
scenario, when a client at one location makes changes to user data, updated
user data is passed (propagated) to T-Servers at other locations.

The Event Propagation feature consists of User Data update propagation and
Party Events propagation.
User Data Propagation

User data propagation takes place when a client at one location makes changes
to user data associated with a call that was made, transferred, conferenced, or
routed to other locations. The remote clients involved with the call are notified
about the changes with EventAttachedDataChanged.
When T-Server receives a local update to user data (that is, when a client of
this T-Server has changed the call’s user data), T-Server determines if parties
at remote locations are involved with the call and, if so, sends (propagates) the
updated user data to the T-Servers at remote locations.
When T-Server receives a remote update to user data (that is, when a client of a
remote T-Server has changed the call’s user data and the remote T-Server has
used the Event Propagation feature to send the updated user data), T-Server:
1. Updates the user data of the corresponding local call.
2. Determines if parties at other remote locations are involved with the call
and, if so, propagates the updated user data to T-Servers at other remote
locations.
The locations to which user data is propagated are selected based on a call
distribution topology. That is, the updated user data is passed directly to the
location to which a call was sent and to the location from which the call was
received, excluding the location from which the update was received.
For example, consider a call made from location A to location B, and then
conferenced from location B to location C. The three instances of the call
reside at different locations: the first instance is at location A, the second
instance is at location B, and the third instance is at location C. The Event
Propagation feature is employed in the following scenarios:
• When T-Server at location A receives a local update to user data, it notifies
T-Server at location B (to which it sent the call) about changes to the call’s
user data. Thus, T-Server at location B receives a remote update to user
data and, in turn, notifies T-Server at location C (to which it sent the call)
about these changes.
Although T-Server at location C receives a remote update to user data, it
does not pass the notification to any other T-Servers, because it did not
send the call to any other locations. As mentioned earlier, T-Servers at
locations B and C update the user data of the corresponding local calls and
notify their clients about the changes with EventAttachedDataChanged.
• When T-Server at location B receives a local update to user data, it notifies
T-Server at location C (to which it sent the call) and T-Server at location A
(from which it received the call) about changes to the call’s user data.
Thus, T-Servers at locations C and A receive a remote update to user data.
80 Framework 8.1
Because T-Server at location C did not send the call to any other locations,
and T-Server at location A originated the call, neither of these T-Servers
passes the notification to any other T-Servers. T-Servers at locations C and
A update the user data of the corresponding local calls and notify their
clients about the changes with EventAttachedDataChanged.
• When T-Server at location C receives a local update to user data, it notifies
T-Server at location B (from which it received the call) about changes to
the call’s user data. Thus, T-Server at location B receives a remote update
to user data and, in turn, notifies T-Server at location A (from which it
received the call) about these changes.
Although T-Server at location A receives a remote update to user data, it
does not pass the notification to any other T-Servers, because it originated
the call. T-Servers at locations B and A update the user data of the
corresponding local calls and notify their clients about the changes with
EventAttachedDataChanged.
When a call is distributed between location A and location C using location B,
and is then deleted on location B, propagation between locations A and C still
occurs through the transit node at location B.
Party Events Propagation

Party events propagation takes place when a transfer or a conference is
completed for a call that was made to or from one or more remote locations, or
when a conference party is removed from the conference.
In these cases, the Event Propagation feature distributes party events, such as
EventPartyChanged, EventPartyAdded, and EventPartyDeleted, to remote
locations involved with the call, according to appropriate call model scenarios.
For example, consider a call made from DN 1 to DN 2 on location A. A
TInitiateConference request is then issued for DN 2 to transfer the call to
external DN 3 on location B. That transfer is made by means of ISCC routing.
When this conference is completed on location A, the Event Propagation
feature sends EventPartyChanged to location B and distributes this event to
involved client applications that are connected to location B and registered for
DN 3. After that, if a party of the conference is removed from the conference
(for example, a party on DN 2), the Event Propagation feature sends
EventPartyDeleted to location B and distributes this event to client applications
registered for DN 3.
If a call involved in the propagation has no local parties but has two or more
remote parties, the party events propagation is processed in the same manner
as the propagation of user data updates.
For a complete event flow in such scenarios, refer to the Genesys Events and
Models Reference Manual.

Switch Partitioning
A multi-site environment with switch partitioning or intelligent trunks can be
defined as a configuration of multiple virtual switches (or Switch objects) that
are defined in Configuration Manager under a single Switching Office object
representing a physical switch. Each Switch object has its own instance of a
T-Server application. All T-Server applications connect to the switch via the
same or different CTI link or a gateway. (See Figure 10.)
When the Event Propagation feature is active, updated user data and
party-related events—EventPartyChanged, EventPartyDeleted, and
EventPartyAdded—are propagated to T-Servers that are involved in call
transactions, such as transfer or conference. However, with switch partitioning,
the call instances may reside at one partition or at different partitions.
Site A
T-Server
T-Server Client
T-Server
T-Server Client
Switch
Figure 10: Switch Partitioning Architecture
Starting with version 8.0, in addition to ConnIDs and UserData, T-Server can
synchronize the CallType attribute. Each T-Server is required to register all
DNs it monitors. In a multi-partitioned environment, when configured, calls
between partitions are reported as internal (CallTypeInternal). In a
non-partitioned environment, such calls are reported as inbound
(CallTypeInbound) and/or outbound (CallTypeOutbound), depending on the
direction of a call. In order for T-Servers to report calls between specified
partitions as internal, registered DNs of these partitions must be assigned to a
Switch (T-Server), Switching Office, or Tenant, using the dn-scope
configuration option. If DNs that are involved in calls are not in the T-Server
scope, those DNs will be reported as inbound or outbound.
In addition, T-Server supports LocalCallType and PropagatedCallType
attributes, which depend on the propagated-call-type configuration option
setting for reporting. See the option description on page 158.
82 Framework 8.1
To control race conditions that may occur in the switch-partitioned

environment, use the epp-tout configuration option (see page 173).
Notes: Because of possible delays in TCP/IP connections, a sequence of

events sent for the same call by two or more T-Servers to clients may
appear in an unexpected order. For example, in a simple call scenario
with two partitions, EventRinging and EventEstablished messages
may both arrive before EventDialing.
Genesys switch partitioning does not apply to hardware partitioning
functionality that is supported on some switches.
Table 5 shows the T-Server types that support switch partitioning.

Table 5: T-Server Support for Switch Partitioning
T-Server Type Supported
Alcatel A4400/OXE Yes
Avaya Communication Manager Yes
Avaya TSAPI Yes
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Yes
SIP Server Yes
Event Propagation Configuration

The basic Event Propagation feature configuration includes a setting of
specific configuration options at a T-Server Application level. The advanced
feature configuration allows you to customize the feature at a Switch level.
When determining whether to notify other T-Servers of changes to user data,
or to distribute party events, T-Server checks:
1. Call topology (what location a call came from and to what location the call
was then transferred or conferenced).
2. Outbound parameters of the Switch this T-Server relates to (whether
propagation parameters are configured for the access codes this switch
uses to reach the switch at the location a call came from and the switch at
the location to which the call was then transferred or conferenced).
Warning! The direction of user-data or party-events propagation does not

necessarily match the direction of call distribution. Therefore, the
access code used to deliver the call can differ from the access code
used for the purpose of Event Propagation.

If one of the T-Servers along the call distribution path has the Event
Propagation feature disabled, that T-Server does not distribute events to remote
locations.
Procedure:
Activating Event Propagation: basic configuration
Purpose: To activate the Event Propagation feature for User Data updates and
call-party–associated events (Party Events) distribution.
Start of procedure
3. Open the extrouter section.
4. Set the event-propagation option to the list value.
This setting enables User Data propagation. If you need to enable Party
Events propagation, perform Step 5.
5. Set the use-data-from option to the current value.
This setting enables Party Events propagation.
For the option description and its valid values, see Chapter 8, “T-Server
Common Configuration Options,” on page 153.
End of procedure
Next Steps
• For advanced feature configuration, do the following procedure:
Procedure: Modifying Event Propagation: advanced configuration, on
page 84
Procedure:
Modifying Event Propagation: advanced configuration
Purpose: To modify access codes for advanced Event Propagation

configuration.
84 Framework 8.1
Prerequisites
• Procedure: Activating Event Propagation: basic configuration, on page 84
Overview
You can set Event Propagation parameters using:
• The Default Access Code properties of the Switch that receives an
ISCC-routed call (the destination switch).
• The Access Code properties of the Switch that passes an ISCC-routed call
(the origination switch).
If you do not set up Event Propagation parameters for a given Access Code,
T-Server uses corresponding settings configured for the Default Access Code
of the destination switch.
The procedures for modifying Default Access Codes and Access Codes are
very similar to each other.
Start of procedure
1. Among configured Switches, select the Switch that the configured
T-Server relates to.
2. Open the Switch’s Properties dialog box and click either the Default
Access Codes tab or the Access Codes tab.
3. Select a configured Default Access Code or configured Access Code and
click Edit.
Note: If no Default Access Code is configured, see page 89 for

instructions. If no Access Codes are configured, see page 90 for
instructions.
4. In the Switch Access Code Properties dialog box that opens, specify a value
for the ISCC Protocol Parameters field as follows:

To enable distribution of both user data associated with the call and
call-party–associated events1, type:
propagate=yes
which is the default value.

To enable distribution of user data associated with the call and disable
distribution of call-party–associated events, type:
propagate=udata

To disable distribution of user data associated with the call and enable
distribution of call-party–associated events, type:
1. The following are call-party–associated events: EventPartyChanged, EventPartyDe-

leted, and EventPartyAdded.

Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support ISCC Transaction Monitoring Feature
propagate=party

To disable distribution of both user data associated with the call and
call-party–associated events, type:
propagate=no
5. Click OK to save configuration updates and close the Switch Access Code
6. Click Apply and OK to save configuration updates and close the Switch
End of procedure
ISCC Transaction Monitoring Feature

This feature allows T-Server clients to monitor ISCC transactions that occur
during the call data transfer between T-Servers in a multi-site environment.
In order to be able to monitor ISCC messaging, a T-Server client must
subscribe to the ISCC Transaction Monitoring. Once a subscription request is
confirmed, a client will receive updates about all multi-site operations of this
T-Server.
The TTransactionMonitoring request is used to instruct T-Server to start, stop,
or modify a client’s subscription to Transaction Monitoring feature
notifications by setting the TSubscriptionOperationType parameter to
SubscriptionStart, SubscriptionStop, or SubscriptionModify respectively.
The transaction status is reported in EventTransactionStatus messages to the
subscribed clients.
To determine whether the Transaction Monitoring feature is supported by a
specific T-Server, a T-Server client may query T-Server’s capabilities. For
more information about support of this feature, see Genesys Events and Models
Reference Manual and Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API Reference.
Configuring Multi-Site Support

Prior to configuring T-Server to support multi-site operation, you must read the
“Licensing Requirements” on page 31, as well as previous sections of this
chapter on multi-site deployment. In particular, Table 3 on page 61 shows
which transaction types are supported by a specific T-Server, while Table 4 on
page 66 shows whether your T-Server supports the NetworkCallID attribute for
86 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Configuring Multi-Site Support
the ISCC/COF feature. Use this information as you follow the instructions in
this chapter.
Note: Before attempting to configure a multi-site environment, Genesys

recommends that you plan the changes you want to make to your
existing contact centers. You should then gather the configuration
information you will need (such as the name of each T-Server
application, port assignments, and switch names), and use
Configuration Manager to create and partially configure each T-Server
object. Review multi-site option values in the “extrouter Section” on
page 163 and determine what these values need to be, based on your
network topology.
For T-Server to support multi-site operation, you must create and configure
three types of objects in the Configuration Layer:
1. Applications
2. Switches, including Access Codes
3. DNs
You must configure these objects for origination and destination locations.
Multi-site support features activate automatically at T-Server startup. See
“DNs” on page 94 for details.
Applications
Ensure that T-Server Application objects, and their corresponding Host
objects, exist and are configured for origination and destination locations.
Once you’ve done that, use Configuration Manager to add this configuration to
a T-Server Application.
Procedure:
Configuring T-Server Applications
Purpose: To configure T-Server Application objects for multi-site operation

support.
Start of procedure
2. Click the Connections tab and click Add to add a connection to the
appropriate T-Server. The Connection Info Properties dialog box displays.
3. Use the Browse button to search for the T-Server you want to connect to,
and fill in the following values:

Port ID


Connection Protocol

Local Timeout

Remote Timeout

Trace Mode
4. Click the Options tab. Create a new section called extrouter or open an
existing section with this name.
Note: If you do not create the extrouter section, T-Server uses the
default values of the corresponding configuration options.
5. Open the extrouter section. Configure the options used for multi-site
support.
Note: For a list of options and valid values, see “extrouter Section” on
page 163, in the “T-Server Common Configuration Options”
chapter in Part Two of this document.

7. Repeat this procedure for all T-Servers for origination and destination
locations that are used for multi-site operations.
End of procedure
Next Steps
• See “Switches and Access Codes.”
Switches and Access Codes

Ensure that Switching Office and Switch objects are configured for both
origination and destination locations.
You configure Access Codes to a destination switch in the origination Switch’s
Properties dialog box. The only exception is the Default Access Code, which
is configured at the destination Switch’s Properties dialog box.
You can configure two types of switch Access Codes in the Switch’s
Properties dialog box:
• A Default Access Code (for inbound calls)—Specifies the access code that
other switches can use to access this switch when they originate a
multi-site transaction.
• An Access Code (for outbound calls)—Specifies the access code that this
switch can use when it originates a multi-site transaction to access another
switch.
88 Framework 8.1
When the origination T-Server processes a multi-site transaction, it looks for

an access code to the destination switch. First, T-Server checks the Access
Code of the origination Switch:
• If an access code to the destination switch is configured with the target
type Target ISCC and with any transaction type except Forbidden, T-Server
uses this access code to dial the destination switch.
• If the access code to the destination switch is not configured on the Access
Code tab of the origination switch, the origination T-Server checks the
Default Access Code tab of the destination switch. If an access code is
configured there with the target type Target ISCC and with any transaction
type except Forbidden, T-Server uses this access code to dial the
destination switch.
• If no access code with the required properties is found, T-Server rejects the
transaction.
Note: When migrating from previous releases of T-Servers to 8.1, or when

using T-Servers of different releases (including 8.1) in the same
environment, see “Compatibility Notes” on page 93.
Procedure:
Configuring Default Access Codes
Purpose: To configure the Default Access Codes (one per Switch object) to be
used by other switches to access this switch when they originate a multi-site
transaction.
Prerequisites
• Ensure that Switching Office and Switch objects are configured for both
Start of procedure
1. Among configured Switches, select the Switch that the configured T-Server
relates to.
2. Open the Switch Properties dialog box and click the Default Access Codes
tab.
3. Click Add to open the Access Code Properties dialog box.

4. In the Code field, specify the access code used by remote switches to reach
a DN at this switch. An access code is used as a prefix to the remote switch
numbers.
Note: If no prefix is needed to dial to the configured switch, you can

leave the Code field blank.
5. In the Target Type field, select Target ISCC.

6. In the Route Type field, select a value corresponding to the transaction type
you want to use (given that it is supported for your switch type).
End of procedure
Next Steps
• See “Configuring Access Codes.”
Procedure:
Configuring Access Codes
Purpose: To configure the Access Codes (one or more per Switch object) that
this switch can use when it originates a multi-site transaction to access another
switch.
Prerequisites
Start of procedure
1. Among configured Switches, select the Switch that the configured T-Server
relates to.
2. Open the Switch Properties dialog box and click the Access Codes tab.
4. In the Switch field, specify the switch that this switch can reach using this
access code. Use the Browse button to locate the remote switch.
90 Framework 8.1
5. In the Code field, specify the access code used to reach a DN at the remote
switch from this switch. An access code is used as a prefix to the remote
switch numbers.
Note: If no prefix is needed to dial from one switch to another, you can
leave the Code field blank.
6. In the Target Type field, select Target ISCC.

When you select Target ISCC as your target type, the Properties dialog
box changes its lower pane to the Sources pane. It is here that you enter the
extended parameters for your access codes, by specifying the ISCC
Protocol and ISCC Call Overflow Parameters.
To set these parameters, locate the two drop-down boxes that appear below
the Target Type field in the Sources pane of that Properties dialog box.
a. In the ISCC Protocol Parameters drop-down box, enter the appropriate
ISCC Protocol parameter, as a comma-separated list of one or more of
the following items shown in Table 6:
Table 6: Target Type: ISCC Protocol Parameters
ISCC Protocol Parameters Description
dnis-tail=<number-of-digits> Where number-of-digits is the number

of significant DNIS digits (last digits)
used for call matching. 0 (zero) matches
all digits.
propagate=<yes, udata, party, no> Default is yes. For more information, see
“Modifying Event Propagation: advanced
configuration” on page 84.
direct-network-callid=<> For configuration information, see Part

Two of this document. (Use Table 4 on
page 66 to determine if your T-Server
supports the direct-network-callid
transaction type.)
b. In the ISCC Call Overflow Parameters drop-down box, enter call

overflow parameters, as a comma-separated list of one or more of the
following items shown in Table 7:

Table 7: Target Type: ISCC Call Overflow Parameters
ISCC Call Overflow Parameters Description
match-callid Matches calls using network CallID.
match-ani Matches calls using ANI.

Note: When using match-ani, the
match-flexible parameter must be set to
false.
match-flexible Supports flexible call matching based on

the following values:
Default Value: true
Valid Values: true, false, and
[matching-context-type], where
[matching-context-type] is the
switch-specific value, which must be the
same as the value of the
default-network-call-id-matching
configuration option of the corresponding
T-Server.
inbound-only=<boolean> Default is true. Setting inbound-only

to true disables COF on consultation
and outbound calls.
7. In the Route Type field, select a value corresponding to the transaction type
you want to use (given that it is supported for your switch type). Table 8
contains cross-reference information on transaction types that the
Configuration Layer and T-Server use.
Table 8: Route Type and ISCC Transaction Type Cross-Reference
Route Type Field Value ISCC Transaction Type
Default The first value from the list of values

specified in the cast-type option for the
T-Server at the destination site
Direct direct-callid
Direct ANI direct-ani
Direct Digits direct-digits
Direct DNIS and ANI Reserved
92 Framework 8.1
Table 8: Route Type and ISCC Transaction Type Cross-Reference

(Continued)
Route Type Field Value ISCC Transaction Type
Direct Network Call ID direct-network-callid
Direct No Token direct-notoken
Direct UUI direct-uui
DNIS Pooling dnis-pooling
Forbidden External routing to this destination is not

allowed
ISCC defined protocol Reserved
PullBack pullback
Re-Route reroute
Route route
End of procedure
Next Steps
• After configuring a switch for multi-site support, proceed with the
configuration of DNs assigned to this switch.
Compatibility Notes
When migrating from previous releases of T-Servers to 8.1, or when using
T-Servers of different releases (including 8.1) in the same environment, keep
in mind the following compatibility issues:
• The Target External Routing Point value of the Target Type field is
obsolete and provided only for backward compatibility with T-Servers of
releases 5.1 and 6.0. When two access codes for the same switch are
configured, one with the Target ISCC target type and the other with the
Target External Routing Point target type, T-Servers of releases 8.x, 7.x,
6.5, and 6.1:
 Use the Target ISCC access code for transactions with T-Servers of
releases 8.x, 7.x, 6.5, and 6.1.
 Use the Target External Routing Point access code for transactions
with T-Servers of releases 5.1 and 6.0.

When the only access code configured for a switch has the Target External
Routing Point target type, T-Server uses this access code for all
transactions.
• When the Target External Routing Point value of the Target Type field is
configured, you must set the Route Type field to one of the following:

Default to enable the route transaction type

Label to enable the direct-ani transaction type

Direct to enable the direct transaction type
Note: The direct transaction type in releases 5.1 and 6.0 corresponds to
the direct-callid transaction type in releases 6.1 and later.

UseExtProtocol to enable the direct-uui transaction type

PostFeature to enable the reroute transaction type
These values are fully compatible with the transaction types supported in
T-Server release 5.1.
• For successful multi-site operations between any two locations served by
release 5.1 T-Servers, identical Route Type values must be set in the
Switch’s Access Code Properties dialog boxes for both the origination and
destination switches.
DNs
Use the procedures from this section to configure access resources for various
transaction types.
Procedure:
Configuring access resources for the route
transaction type
Purpose: To configure dedicated DNs required for the route transaction type.
Prerequisites
94 Framework 8.1
Start of procedure
1. Under a configured Switch, select the DNs folder. From the main menu,
select File > New > DN to create a new DN object.
2. On the General tab of the DN’s Properties dialog box, specify the number
of the configured DN as the value of the Number field. This value must
correspond to the Routing Point number on the switch.
3. Select External Routing Point as the value of the Type field.
4. If a dialable number for that Routing Point is different from its DN name,
specify the number in the Association field.
5. Click the Access Numbers tab. Click Add and specify these access number
parameters:

Origination switch.

Access number that must be dialed to reach this DN from the
origination switch.
In determining an access number for the Routing Point, T-Server composes
it of the values of the following properties (in the order listed):
a. Access number (if specified).
b. Switch access code from the switch of the origination party to the
switch to which the Routing Point belongs, concatenated with its
Association (if the Association value is specified).
c. Switch access code from the switch of the origination party to the
switch to which the Routing Point belongs, concatenated with the
number for the DN.
d. Default access code of the switch to which the Routing Point belongs,
concatenated with its Association (if the Association value is
specified).
e. Default access code of the switch to which the Routing Point belongs,
concatenated with the number for the DN.
Note: If option use-implicit-access-numbers is set to true, the access

number composed of switch access code and DN can be used for
external transfers of calls originating at switches for which an
access number is not specified.
End of procedure

Procedure:
Configuring access resources for the dnis-pool
transaction type
Purpose: To configure dedicated DNs required for the dnis-pool transaction

type.
Start of procedure
2. On the General tab of the DN’s Properties dialog box, specify the number
of the configured DN as the value of the Number field. This value must be a
dialable number on the switch.
3. Select Access Resource as the Type field and type dnis as the value of the
Resource Type field on the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Access Numbers tab. Click Add and specify these Access Number
parameters:
Origination switch.

Access number that must be dialed to reach this DN from the
origination switch.
An access number for the access resource is determined in the same
manner as for the route access resource.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring access resources for direct-* transaction
types
Start of procedure
You can use any configured DN as an access resource for the direct-*
transaction types. (The * symbol stands for any of the following: callid, uui,
notoken, ani, or digits.)
You can select the Use Override check box on the Advanced tab to indicate
whether the override value should be used instead of the number value to dial
to the DN. You must specify this value if the DN has a different DN name and
dialable number. In fact, this value is required for T-Servers for some switch
96 Framework 8.1
types—such as Aspect ACD, Nortel Communication Server 2000/2100, and

Spectrum.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring access resources for ISCC/COF
Purpose: To configure dedicated DNs required for the ISCC/COF feature.
Start of procedure
Note: Use Table 4 on page 66 to determine if your T-Server supports the

ISCC/COF feature.
2. On the General tab of the DN Properties dialog box, enter the name of the
configured DN in the Number field.
Note: The name of a DN of type Access Resource must match the name
of a DN in your configuration environment (typically, a DN of
type Routing Point or ACD Queue), so T-Server can determine
whether the calls arriving at this DN are overflowed calls.
3. Select Access Resource as the value for the Type field.

4. On the Advanced tab, type cof-in or cof-not-in as the value for the
Resource Type field.
Note: Calls coming to DNs with the cof-not-in value for the Resource
Type are never considered to be overflowed.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring access resources for non-unique ANI
Purpose: To configure dedicated DNs required for the non-unique-ani

resource type.

The non-unique-ani resource type is used to block direct-ani and COF/ani

from relaying on ANI when it matches configured/enabled resource digits.
Using non-unique-ani, T-Server checks every ANI against a list of
non-unique-ani resources.
Start of procedure
2. On the General tab of the DN Properties dialog box, specify the ANI
digits that need to be excluded from normal processing.
3. Select Access Resource as the value for the Type field.
4. On the Advanced tab, specify the Resource Type field as non-unique-ani.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying DNs for isolated switch partitioning
Purpose: To modify DNs that belong to a particular partition where switch

partitioning is used.
This configuration instructs T-Server to select an External Routing Point that
has the same partition as the requested destination DN.
Note: When a target DN is not configured or has no configured partition

name, T-Server allocates a DN of the External Routing Point type that
belongs to any partition.
Start of procedure
1. Under a Switch object, select the DNs folder.
2. Open the Properties dialog box of a particular DN.
3. Click the Annex tab.
4. Create a new section named TServer.
5. Within that section, create a new option named epn. Set the option value to
the partition name to which the DN belongs.
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 for all DNs, including DNs of the External Routing Point
type, that belong to the same switch partition.
98 Framework 8.1
End of procedure
Configuration Examples
This section provides two configuration examples and describes how the
configuration settings affect T-Server’s behavior.
Multiple Transaction Types

This example demonstrates the difference in how ISCC directs a call when you
specify two different transaction types (route and direct-ani).
In this example, you configure an origination and a destination switch for as
described in “Switches and Access Codes” on page 88.
1. Among configured Switches, select the origination Switch.
2. Open the Switch Properties dialog box and click the Default Access Codes
tab.
4. Set the Access Code field to 9.
6. Among configured Switches, select the destination Switch.
7. Under the destination Switch, configure a DN as described in
“Configuring access resources for the route transaction type” on page 94.
8. Set the DN Number field to 5001234567.
9. Click the Advanced tab of this DN’s Properties dialog box.
10. Select the Use Override check box and enter 1234567 in the Use Override
field.
11. When you are finished, click Apply or Save.
12. Use a T-Server client application to register for this new DN with the
destination T-Server and, therefore, with the switch.
13. Request to route a call from any DN at the origination switch to the
destination DN you have just configured:

If you are using the route ISCC transaction type, the client requests
that T-Server deliver a call to a destination location using the DN
number 5001234567. ISCC requests that the switch dial one of the
external routing points at the destination location, using the value
either of the Access Number field or of the Access Code field, which is 9,
concatenated with the external routing point at the destination location.
The call is routed to the DN number 5001234567.

Chapter 3: Multi-Site Support Next Steps

If you are using the direct-ani ISCC transaction type, the client
requests that T-Server deliver a call to a destination location using the
DN number 1234567, which is the Use Override value. ISCC requests
that the switch dial 91234567, which is a combination of the Switch
Access Code value and the Use Override value. The destination T-Server
is waiting for the call to directly arrive at DN number 5001234567.
Call Overflow Methods

This section demonstrates how to indicate which overflow methods a switch
supports.
In this example, for T-Server to use ANI/OtherDN matching in call overflow
and manual transfer scenarios, set the ISCC Call Overflow Parameters to:
match-ani, inbound-only=true
when configuring Switch Access Codes as described on page 90.
With this setting, the switch’s location is queried for call data each time the
destination T-Server receives an inbound call with the ANI or OtherDN attribute.
For T-Server to use NetworkCallID matching in call overflow and manual
transfer scenarios, set the ISCC Call Overflow Parameters to (for example):
match-callid, inbound-only=false
when configuring Switch Access Codes as described on page 90.
With this setting, the switch’s location is queried for call data each time the
destination T-Server receives a call of any type (including inbound) with the
NetworkCallID attribute.
Next Steps
Continue with Chapter 4, “Starting and Stopping T-Server Components,” on
page 101 to test your configuration and installation.
100 Framework 8.1

Chapter
4 Starting and Stopping

T-Server Components
This chapter describes methods for stopping and starting T-Server, focusing on
manual startup for T-Server and HA Proxy for all switches. It includes these
sections:

Command-Line Parameters, page 101
 Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer, page 103

Starting with Startup Files, page 104

Starting Manually, page 105
 Verifying Successful Startup, page 111

Stopping Manually, page 111

Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager, page 112
 Next Steps, page 112
Command-Line Parameters
You can start and stop Framework components using the Management Layer, a
startup file, a manual procedure, or the Windows Services Manager.
With all these methods, command-line parameters are usually required for a
server application in addition to an executable file name.
Common command-line parameters are as follows:
-host The name of the host on which Configuration Server is

running.
-port The communication port that client applications must use to
connect to Configuration Server.
-app The exact name of an Application object as configured in
the Configuration Database.

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Command-Line Parameters
-l The license address. Use for the server applications that

check out technical licenses. Can be either of the following:
• The full path to, and the exact name of, the license file
used by an application. For example, -l
/opt/mlink/license/license.dat.
• The host name and port of the license server, as specified
in the SERVER line of the license file, in the port@host
format. For example, -l 7260@ctiserver.
Note: Specifying the License Manager’s host and port
parameter eliminates the need to store a copy of a license
file on all computers running licensed applications.
-V The version of a Framework component. Note that
specifying this parameter does not start an application, but
returns its version number instead. You can use either
uppercase or lowercase.
-nco X/Y The Nonstop Operation feature is activated; X exceptions
occurring within Y seconds do not cause an application to
exit. If the specified number of exceptions is exceeded
within the specified number of seconds, the application
exits or, if so configured, the Management Layer restarts the
application. If the -nco parameter is not specified, the
default value of 6 exceptions handled in 10 seconds applies.
To disable the Nonstop Operation feature, specify -nco 0
when starting the application.
-lmspath The full path to log messages files (the common file named
common.lms and the application-specific file with the
extension *.lms) that an application uses to generate log
events. This parameter is used when the common and
application-specific log message files are located in a
directory other than the application’s working directory,
such as when the application’s working directory differs
from the directory to which the application is originally
installed.
Note that if the full path to the executable file is specified in
the startup command-line (for instance,
c:\gcti\multiserver.exe), the path specified for the
executable file is used for locating the *.lms files, and the
value of the lmspath parameter is ignored.
- transport-port <port number> is the port number that a client will use for
<port number> its TCP/IP connection to Configuration Server. See the
Client-Side Port Definition section in the Genesys 8.x
Security Deployment Guide for more information.
- transport-address <IP address> is the IP address that a client will use for its
<IP address> TCP/IP connection to Configuration Server. See the
Client-Side Port Definition section in the Genesys 8.x
Security Deployment Guide for more information.
102 Framework 8.1

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer
Note: In the command-line examples in this document, angle brackets

indicate variables that must be replaced with appropriate values.
Starting and Stopping with the

Management Layer
Procedure:
Configuring T-Server to start with the Management
Layer
Start of procedure
2. Click the Start Info tab.
3. Specify the directory where the application is installed and/or is to run as
the Working Directory.
4. Specify the name of the executable file as the command-line.
5. Specify command-line parameters as the Command–Line Arguments.
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components
are described on page 101.
End of procedure
Note: Before starting an application with the Management Layer, make sure
the startup parameters of the application are correctly specified in the
application’s Properties dialog box in Configuration Manager.
After its command-line parameters are correctly specified in the Properties

dialog box, you can start and stop T-Server from Solution Control Interface
(SCI), which is the graphical interface component of the Management Layer.
(The starting procedure for SCI is described in the Framework 8.1 Deployment
Guide.) Framework 8.0 Solution Control Interface Help provides complete
instructions on starting and stopping applications.
You can also use the Management Layer to start a T-Server that has failed. To
enable T-Server’s autorestart functionality, select the corresponding check box
in the Application’s Properties dialog box.

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Starting with Startup Files
Note that when you start (or restart) an application via the Management Layer,
the application inherits environment variables from Local Control Agent
(LCA), which executes the startup command. Therefore, you must also set the
environment variables required by the application for the account that
runs LCA.
Warning! Stopping an application via the Management Layer is not

considered an application failure. Therefore, the Management
Layer does not restart applications that it has stopped unless an
appropriate alarm condition and alarm reaction are configured for
these applications.
Starting with Startup Files

Startup files are files with the extension run.sh (on UNIX) or startServer.bat
(on Windows), which installation scripts create and place into the applications’
directories during the installations. These files are created for all Framework
server applications except:
• Configuration Server (primary or backup) running on Windows.
• Backup Configuration Server running on UNIX.
• DB Server running on Windows.
• LCA running on either Windows or UNIX.
When using a startup file, verify that the startup parameters the installation
script inserted in the startup file are correct. Use the following instructions for
UNIX and Windows to start those application for which startup files are
created. See the appropriate sections in “Starting Manually” on page 105 to
identify which applications should be running for a particular application to
start.
Procedure:
Starting T-Server on UNIX with a startup file
Start of procedure
1. Go to the directory where an application is installed.
2. Type the following command line:
sh run.sh
End of procedure
104 Framework 8.1

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Starting Manually
Procedure:
Starting T-Server on Windows with a startup file
Start of procedure
To start T-Server on Windows with a startup file, use either of these methods:
• Go to the directory where an application is installed and double-click the
startServer.bat icon.
Or
• From the MS-DOS window, go to the directory where the application is
installed and type the following command-line:
startServer.bat
End of procedure
Starting Manually
When starting an application manually, you must specify the startup
parameters at the command prompt, whether you are starting on UNIX or
Windows. At the command prompt, command-line parameters must follow the
name of the executable file. On the Shortcut tab of the Program Properties
dialog box, command-line parameters must also follow the name of the
executable file.
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
described on page 101.
If an Application object name, as configured in the Configuration Database,
contains spaces (for example, T-Server Nortel), the Application name must be
surrounded by quotation marks in the command-line:
-app “T-Server Nortel”
You must specify the rest of the command-line parameters as for any other
application.
The following sections provide general instructions for starting HA Proxy and
T-Server manually. Along with these instructions, refer to Table 9, which lists
T-Servers and HA Proxy executable file names for supported switches for
Windows and UNIX operating systems.

Table 9: T-Server and HA Proxy Executable Names
T-Server Type T-Server Executable File Name HA Proxy

Executable File
Name
UNIX Windows UNIX Windows
Aastra MXONE CSTA I md110_server md110_server.exe Not Applicable
Alcatel A4200/OXO a4200_server a4200_server.exe Not Applicable
Alcatel A4400/OXE a4400_server a4400_server.exe Not Applicable
Aspect ACD aspect_server aspect_server.exe Not Applicable
Avaya Communication avayacm_server avayacm_server.exe Not Applicablea

Manager
Avaya INDeX Not Applicable index_server.exe Not Applicable
Avaya TSAPI avayatsapi_server avayatsapi_server.exe Not Applicable
Cisco UCCE CiscoUCCE_server CiscoUCCE_server.exe Not Applicable
Cisco Unified ciscocm_server ciscocm_server.exe Not Applicable

Communications
Manager
DataVoice Dharma Dharma_server Dharma_server.exe Not Applicable
Digitro AXS/20 digitro_server digitro_server.exe Not Applicable
EADS Intecom M6880 intecom_server intecom_server.exe Not Applicable
EADS Telecom M6500 m6500_server m6500_server.exe Not Applicable
eOn eQueue eon_server eon_server.exe Not Applicable
Fujitsu F9600 Not Applicable F9600_server.exe Not Applicable
Huawei C&C08 cc08_server cc08_server.exe Not Applicable
Huawei NGN huaweingn_server huaweingn_server.exe Not Applicable
Mitel MiTAI Not Applicable mitel_server.exe Not Applicable
NEC NEAX/APEX neax_server neax_server.exe Not Applicable
Nortel Communication ncs2000_server ncs2000_server.exe ha_proxy_ ha_proxy_

Server 2000/2100 dms dms.exe
106 Framework 8.1

Table 9: T-Server and HA Proxy Executable Names (Continued)

Executable File
Name
Nortel Communication Not Applicable

Server 1000 with succession_server succession_server.exe
SCSS/MLS
Philips Sopho iS3000 iS3000_server iS3000_server.exe ha_proxy_ ha_proxy_

iS3000 iS3000.exe
Radvision iContact nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
Samsung IP-PCX IAP samsung_server samsung_server.exe Not Applicable
Siemens Hicom rolmcb4_server rolmcb4_server.exe Not Applicable

300/HiPath 400 CSTA I
Siemens HiPath 3000 HiPath3000_server HiPath3000_server.exe Not Applicable
Siemens HiPath 4000 HiPath4000_server HiPath4000_server.exe Not Applicable

CSTA III
Siemens HiPath DX HiPathDX_server HiPathDX_server.exe Not Applicable
SIP Server sip_server sip_server.exe Not Applicable
Spectrum spectrum_server spectrum_server.exe Not Applicable
Tadiran Coral Coral_server Coral_server.exe Not Applicable
Teltronics 20-20 Teltronics2020_server Teltronics2020_ ha_proxy_ ha_proxy_

server.exe teltronics teltronics
2020 2020.exe
Tenovis Integral 33/55 Tenovis_server Tenovis_server.exe Not Applicable
Network T-Servers
AT&T nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
Concert nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
CRSP nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
DTAG dtag_server dtag_server.exe Not Applicable
GenSpec genspec_server genspec_server.exe Not Applicable

Table 9: T-Server and HA Proxy Executable Names (Continued)

Executable File
Name
ISCP nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
IVR Server, using nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable

network configuration
KPN kpn_server kpn_server.exe Not Applicable
MCI mci800_server mci800_server.exe Not Applicable
NGSN nts_server nts_server.exe Not Applicable
Network SIP Server tsip_server tsip_server.exe Not Applicable
Sprint sprint_server sprint_server.exe Not Applicable
SR3511 sr3511_server sr3511_server.exe Not Applicable
Stentor stentor_server stentor_server.exe Not Applicable
a. For releases prior to 7.1, this T-Server has an HA Proxy available: ha_proxy_g3tcp (UNIX) or
ha_proxy_g3tcp.exe (Windows).
HA Proxy
If you do not use HA Proxy in your Genesys implementation, proceed to
“T-Server” on page 109.
If one or more HA Proxy components are required for the T-Server
connection, start HA Proxy before starting T-Server.
Before starting HA Proxy, be sure that the following components are running:
• DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
• Configuration Server
108 Framework 8.1

Procedure:
Starting HA Proxy on UNIX manually
Start of procedure
1. Go to the directory where HA Proxy is installed and type the following
command-line:
ha_proxy_<switch> -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <HA Proxy Application>
2. Replace ha_proxy_<switch> with the correct HA Proxy executable name,
which depends on the type of the switch used.
Table 9 on page 106 lists HA Proxy executable names for supported
switches.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Starting HA Proxy on Windows manually
Start of procedure
1. Start HA Proxy from either the Start menu or the MS-DOS window. If using
the MS-DOS window, go to the directory where HA Proxy is installed and
type the following command-line:
ha_proxy_<switch>.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <HA Proxy Application>
2. Replace ha_proxy_<switch>.exe with the correct HA Proxy executable
name, which depends on the type of the switch used.
Table 9 on page 106 lists HA Proxy executable names for supported
switches.
End of procedure
T-Server
Before starting T-Server, be sure that the following components are running:
• DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
• Configuration Server
• License Manager
Note: If an HA Proxy component is required for the T-Server connection,

HA Proxy must be started before T-Server.


Procedure:
Starting T-Server on UNIX manually
Start of procedure
1. Go to the directory where T-Server is installed and type the following
command-line:
<switch>_server -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <T-Server Application>
-l <license address> -nco [X]/[Y]
2. Replace <switch>_server with the correct T-Server executable name,
Table 9 on page 106 lists T-Server executable names for supported
switches.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Starting T-Server on Windows manually
Start of procedure
1. Start T-Server from either the Start menu or the MS-DOS window. If using
the MS-DOS window, go to the directory where T-Server is installed and type
the following command-line:
<switch>_server.exe -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <T-Server Application>
-l <license address> -nco [X]/[Y]
2. Replace <switch>_server.exe with the correct T-Server executable name,
Table 9 on page 106 lists T-Server executable names for supported
switches.
End of procedure
110 Framework 8.1

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Verifying Successful Startup
Verifying Successful Startup

After executing the startup command, you might want to check whether it was
successful.
If you used the Management Layer to start either T-Server or HA Proxy, check
whether Solution Control Interface displays Started or Service Unavailable
status for the corresponding application. Refer to the “Troubleshooting”
section of the Framework 8.1 Management Layer User’s Guide if the startup
command does not result in either Started or Service Unavailable status for
some period of time.
If you start your T-Server or HA Proxy with startup files or manually, and if
you have configured logging to console or a log file, check the log for
messages similar to the following:
• T-Server log file: Link connected
• HA Proxy log file: Link connected
Stopping Manually
The following stopping procedures apply to Genesys server applications, such
as DB Server, Configuration Server, Message Server, Local Control Agent,
Solution Control Server, HA Proxy, T-Server, and Stat Server.
Procedure:
Stopping T-Server on UNIX manually
Start of procedure
To stop a server application from its console window on UNIX, use either of
these commands:
• Ctrl+C
• kill <process number>
End of procedure
Procedure:
Stopping T-Server on Windows manually
Start of procedure
To stop a server application on Windows, use either of these commands:

Chapter 4: Starting and Stopping T-Server Components Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager
• To stop a server application from its console window on Windows, use the
Ctrl+C command.
• To stop a server application on Windows, use the End Task button on the
Windows Task Manager.
End of procedure
Starting and Stopping with Windows

Services Manager
When starting an application installed as a Windows Service, make sure the
startup parameters of the application are correctly specified in the ImagePath in
the Application folder in the Registry Editor. The ImagePath must have the
following value data:
<full path>\<executable file name> -service <Application Name as
Service> -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <Application Name>
-l <license address>
where the command-line parameters common to Framework server
components are described on page 101 and
-service The name of the Application running as a Windows Service;
typically, it matches the Application name specified in the
-app command-line parameter.
Framework components installed as Windows Services with the autostart
capability are automatically started each time a computer on which they are
installed is rebooted.
You can start Framework components installed as Windows Services with the
manual start capability with the Start button in Services Manager.
Note: Use the Windows Services window to change the startup mode from
Automatic to Manual and vice versa.
Regardless of a component’s start capability, you can stop Framework

components installed as Windows Services with the Stop button in Services
Manager.
Next Steps
This chapter concludes Part One of this document—the set of general
instructions for deploying any T-Server. Refer to subsequent chapters in this
guide for detailed reference information and any special procedural
instructions that pertain to your particular T-Server.
112 Framework 8.1

Part
2 T-Server Configuration
Part Two of this Network T-Server Deployment Guide contains reference
information specific to your T-Server. However, it also contains information
on all T-Server options, both those specific to your T-Server and those
common to all T-Servers. The information is divided among these chapters:
• Chapter 5, “AT&T–Specific Configuration,” on page 115, describes
compatibility and configuration information specific to ATT, including
recommendations for the switch configuration.
• Chapter 6, “Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T,” on
page 117, describes which features this T-Server supports, including
T-Library functionality, use of the Extensions attribute, and error
messages.
• Chapter 7, “Common Configuration Options,” on page 131, describes log
configuration options that are common to all Genesys server applications.
• Chapter 8, “T-Server Common Configuration Options,” on page 153,
describes configuration options common to all T-Server types including
options for multi-site configuration.
• Chapter 9, “Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T,” on
page 181, describes configuration options specific to this T-Server,
including the link-related options—those which address the interface
between T-Server and the switch.

Part 2: T-Server Configuration New in Network T-Server for AT&T
New in Network T-Server for AT&T

The following new feature is now available in the initial 8.1 release of
Network T-Server for AT&T:
• Network T-Server now supports version 9.1 of Natural Access software.
• Network T-Server now supports vSphere 4 Hypervisor.
Notes: • For a list of new features common to all T-Servers, see “New for
All T-Servers in 8.1” on page 13.
• Configuration option changes that apply to Network T-Server for
AT&T are described in “Changes from 8.0 to 8.1” on page 193.
114 Framework 8.1

Chapter
5 AT&T–Specific
Configuration
This chapter presents reference information specific for configuring Network
T-Server for AT&T. It contains the following section:

Manual Configuration of Telephony Objects, page 115
Note: For general instructions on T-Server deployment procedures, refer to

Chapter 2, “T-Server General Deployment,” on page 29. Use the
Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide to prepare accurate configuration
information. You may also consult Configuration Manager Help,
which contains detailed information on configuring objects.
Manual Configuration of Telephony

Objects
This section describes the telephony objects that you need to configure for
Network T-Server for AT&T using Configuration Manager.
Switching Office
The Switching Office Type for the Network T-Server for AT&T is: AT&T 800
ICP Gateway.
Service Numbers
The toll-free numbers used as network-level routing points must be configured
under the network switch as DNs of type Service Number.

Chapter 5: AT&T–Specific Configuration Manual Configuration of Telephony Objects
Note: For option information common to all T-Servers, refer to Chapter 8,

“T-Server Common Configuration Options,” on page 153. For specific
option information, see Chapter 9, “Configuration Options in Network
T-Server for AT&T,” on page 181.
116 Framework 8.1

Chapter
6 Supported Functionality in
This chapter describes the telephony functionality supported by the Network
T-Server for AT&T, and includes these sections

T-Library Functionality, page 117
 Load Balancing, page 125

T-Server Error Messages, page 126

Known Limitations, page 128
T-Library Functionality
The tables in this chapter present T-Library functionality supported in the
AT&T switch. The table entries use these notations:
• N—Not supported.
• Y—Supported.
• E—Event only is supported.
• I—Internal reserved for Genesys Engineering.
In Table 10, when a set of events is sent in response to a single request, the
events are listed in an arbitrary order. An asterisk (*) indicates the event that
contains the same Reference ID as the request. For more information, refer to
the Genesys Events and Models Reference Manual and the Voice Platform SDK
8.x .NET (or Java) API Reference.
Table 10 reflects only that switch functionality used by Genesys software, and
might not include the complete set of events offered by the switch.
Certain requests listed in Table 10 are reserved for internal use and are listed
here merely for completeness of information.
Notes describing specific functionalities appear at the end of the table.

Chapter 6: Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T T-Library Functionality
Table 10: Supported Functionality
Feature Request Request Subtype Corresponding Event(s) Supported
General Requests
TOpenServer EventServerConnected Y
TOpenServerEx EventServerConnected Y
TCloseServer EventServerDisconnected Y
TSetInputMask EventACK Y
TDispatch Not Applicable Y
TScanServer Not Applicable Y
TScanServerEx Not Applicable Y
Registration Requests
TRegisterAddressa EventRegistered Y
TUnregisterAddressa EventUnregistered Y
Call-Handling Requests
TMakeCallb Regular EventDialing N
DirectAgent N
SupervisorAssist N
Priority N
DirectPriority N
TAnswerCall EventEstablished N
TReleaseCall EventReleased N
TClearCall EventReleased N
THoldCall EventHeld N
TRetrieveCallc EventRetrieved N
TRedirectCall EventReleased N
TMakePredictiveCall EventDialing* N
EventQueued
118 Framework 8.1

Table 10: Supported Functionality (Continued)
Transfer/Conference Requests
TInitiateTransferb EventHeld N
EventDialing*
TCompleteTransfer First arriving N

EventReleased*
EventPartyChanged
TInitiateConferenceb EventHeld N
EventDialing*
TCompleteConference EventReleased* N
EventRetrieved
EventPartyChanged
EventPartyAdded
TDeleteFromConference EventPartyDeleted* N
EventReleased
TReconnectCalld,d EventReleased N
EventRetrieved*
TAlternateCall EventHeld* N
EventRetrieved
TMergeCalls ForTransfer EventReleased* N

EventPartyChanged
ForConference EventReleased* N
EventRetrieved
EventPartyChanged
EventPartyAdded
TMuteTransferb EventHeld, EventDialing* N

EventReleased
EventPartyChanged
TSingleStepTransferb EventReleased* N
EventPartyChanged
TSingleStepConference EventPartyAdded* N
EventRinging*
EventEstablished

Call-Routing Requests
TRouteCallb Unknown EventRouteUsed Y
Default Y
Label Y
OverwriteDNIS Y
DDD Y
IDDD Y
Direct Y
Reject Y
Announcement Y
PostFeature Y
DirectAgent Y
Priority Y
DirectPriority Y
AgentID Y
CallDisconnect Y
Call-Treatment Requests
TApplyTreatment Unknown (EventTreatmentApplied + N

EventTreatmentEnd)/
EventTreatmentNotApplied
IVR N
Music N
RingBack N
Silence N
Busy N
CollectDigits N
120 Framework 8.1

TApplyTreatment (cont.) PlayAnnouncement (EventTreatmentApplied + N

EventTreatmentEnd)/
PlayAnnouncementAnd- EventTreatmentNotApplied N
Digits
VerifyDigits N
RecordUserAnnouncement N
DeleteUserAnnouncement N
CancelCall N
PlayApplication N
SetDefaultRoute N
TextToSpeech N
TextToSpeechAndDigits N
FastBusy N
RAN N
TGiveMusicTreatment EventTreatmentApplied N
TGiveRingBackTreatment EventTreatmentApplied N
TGiveSilenceTreatment EventTreatmentApplied N
DTMF Requests
TCollectDigits EventDigitsCollected N
TSendDTMF EventDTMFSent N
Voice-Mail Requests
TOpenVoiceFile EventVoiceFileOpened N
TCloseVoiceFile EventVoiceFileClosed N
TLoginMailBox EventMailBoxLogin N
TLogoutMailBox EventMailBoxLogout N
TPlayVoice EventVoiceFileEndPlay N

Agent & DN Feature Requests
TAgentLogin EventAgentLogin N
TAgentLogout EventAgentLogout N
TAgentSetIdleReason EventAgentIdleReasonSet N
TAgentSetReady EventAgentReady N
TAgentSetNotReady EventAgentNotReady N
TMonitorNextCall OneCall EventMonitoringNextCall N
AllCalls N
TCancelMonitoring EventMonitoringCancelled N
TCallSetForward None EventForwardSet N
Unconditional N
OnBusy N
OnNoAnswer N
OnBusyAndNoAnswer N
SendAllCalls N
TCallCancelForward EventForwardCancel N
TSetMuteOff EventMuteOff N
TSetMuteOn EventMuteOn N
TListenDisconnect EventListenDisconnected N
TListenReconnect EventListenReconnected N
TSetDNDOn EventDNDOn N
TSetDNDOff EventDNDOff N
TSetMessageWaitingOn EventMessageWaitingOn N
TSetMessageWaitingOff EventMessageWaitingOff N
122 Framework 8.1

Query Requests
TQuerySwitcha DateTime EventSwitchInfo N
ClassifierStat N
TQueryCalla PartiesQuery EventPartyInfo N
StatusQuery Y
TQueryAddressa AddressStatus EventAddressInfo N
MessageWaitingStatus N
AssociationStatus N
CallForwardingStatus N
AgentStatus N
NumberOfAgentsInQueue N
NumberOfAvailableAgents- N
InQueue
NumberOfCallsInQueue N
AddressType N
CallsQuery N
SendAllCallsStatus N
QueueLoginAudit Y
NumberOfIdleTrunks N
NumberOfTrunksInUse N
DatabaseValue N
DNStatus Y
QueueStatus Y

TQueryLocationa AllLocations EventLocationInfoe I
LocationData I
MonitorLocation I
CancelMonitorLocation I
MonitorAllLocations I
CancelMonitorAllLocations I
LocationMonitorCanceled I
AllLocationsMonitor- I
Canceled
TQueryServera EventServerInfo Y
User-Data Requests
TAttachUserData EventAttachedDataChanged Y
(Obsolete)
TUpdateUserData EventAttachedDataChanged Y
TDeleteUserData EventAttachedDataChanged Y
TDeleteAllUserData EventAttachedDataChanged Y
ISCC (Inter Server Call Control) Requests
TGetAccessNumberb EventAnswerAccessNumber I
TCancelReqGetAccess- EventReqGetAccessNumber- I
Number Canceled
ISCC Transaction Monitoring Requests
TTransactionMonitoring EventACK Y
EventTransactionStatus E
Special Requests
TReserveAgent EventAgentReserved Y
TSendEvent EventACK I
TSendEventEx EventACK I
124 Framework 8.1

Chapter 6: Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T Load Balancing
TSetCallAttributes EventCallInfoChanged I
TSendUserEvent EventACK Y
TPrivateService EventPrivateInfo N
Network Attended Transfer Requests
TNetworkAlternate EventNetworkCallStatus N
TNetworkConsult EventNetworkCallStatus N
TNetworkMerge EventNetworkCallStatus N
TNetworkReconnect EventNetworkCallStatus N
TNetworkSingleStep- EventNetworkCallStatus N
Transfer
TNetworkTransfer EventNetworkCallStatus N
TNetworkPrivateService EventNetworkPrivateInfo N
a. Only the requestor will receive a notification of the event associated with this request.
b. Since this feature request may be made across locations in a multi-site environment, if the location attribute
of the request contains a value relating to any location other than the local site—except when the response to
this request is EventError—there will be a second event response that contains the same reference ID as the
first event. This second event will be either EventRemoteConnectionSuccess or EventRemoteConnectionFailed.
c. Supported only for T-Library clients using version 5.0 or later.
d. TReconnectCall will not function properly if Auto Hold Allowed is enabled on the switch.
e. Two subtypes are supported by EventLocationInfo LocationInfoLocationMonitorCanceled and LocationIn-
foAllLocationsMonitorCanceled.
Load Balancing
Network T-Server for AT&T uses Load Balancing, a type of load-sharing
redundancy, instead of the warm standby or hot standby redundancy type. With
this functionality, two or more Network T-Servers are attached to an SCP. The
SCP distributes calls across the group of load-balanced Network T-Servers and
determines the backup solution in case of failure.
The Solution Control Interface (SCI) sees each one of the attached Network
T-Servers as an active, primary server.

Chapter 6: Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T T-Server Error Messages
Note: The primary/backup methodology found in other applications does not

apply to load balancing, and the SCI switchover functionality does not
apply to load-balanced Network T-Servers.
The Network T-Server applications can be started and stopped manually. Once
they are running, you can manually shut down any Network T-Server, and the
others will continue to run. If a software failure occurs on any given Network
T-Server, any calls already in process on that Network T-Server are lost, but all
the other Network T-Servers continue to operate.
To implement Network T-Server Load Balancing, create multiple, separate
Network T-Server Application objects that share the same Switch object. Enter
Not Specified for the redundancy type, and do not select a backup server.
T-Server Error Messages

The following tables present the complete set of error messages T-Server
distributes with EventError. While some guidelines are given on how to
handle T-Server Common Part (TSCP) error messages, refer to the switch
documentation for resolution of switch-related errors.
Table 11: T-Server Common Part (TSCP) Error Messages
T-Library Symbolic Name Description Recommendations

Error Code
40 TERR_NOMORE_LICENSE No more licenses are Ensure that the license file

available contains enough licenses, or
increase the number of licenses
in T-Server configuration.
41 TERR_NOT_REGISTERED Client had not T-Server reports unauthorized

registered for the DN access. Make sure that the
T-client successfully registers
the DN before sending other
requests involving the DN.
42 TERR_RESOURCE_SEIZED Resource is already The resource (DN) cannot be

seized registered, because another
application has registered for it
in private mode. Select another
DN for registration, or have
that application unregister the
DN first.
126 Framework 8.1

Chapter 6: Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T T-Server Error Messages
Table 11: T-Server Common Part (TSCP) Error Messages (Continued)

Error Code
50 TERR_UNKNOWN_ERROR Unrecognized error T-Server could not identify the

reason for the error. Check the
error message text for possible
explanation of the error.
51 TERR_UNSUP_OPER Unsupported The combination of this

operation T-Server release with this
switch version does not support
the requested operation.
52 TERR_INTERNAL Internal error Contact Genesys Technical

Support.
53 TERR_INVALID_ATTR Invalid attribute Check the content of the client

value request for correctness.
54 TERR_NO_SWITCH No connection to the Ensure that the connection to

switch the switch exists.
55 TERR_PROTO_VERS Incorrect protocol T-Server cannot recognize the

version client version. Make sure that
the client uses the T-Library
protocol; check the T-Server
and client version
compatibility.
56 TERR_INV_CONNID Invalid Connection At the time when T-Server

ID received the request, the
Connection ID was invalid.
Ensure that the specified
Connection ID is associated
with a live call.
57 TERR_TIMEOUT Timeout expired The request processing was

cancelled due to a timeout.
Resubmit the request or check
that the request is valid in
association with the subject of
the request.

Chapter 6: Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T Known Limitations
Table 11: T-Server Common Part (TSCP) Error Messages (Continued)

Error Code
58 TERR_OUT_OF_SERVICE Out of service The referenced resource (for

example, DN) is out of service.
59 TERR_NOT_CONFIGURED DN is not configured A client attempts to register for

in the Configuration a DN that must be configured
Database in the Configuration Database.
Verify that the specified DN
number is valid and, if it is, add
the DN to the switch
configuration in the
Configuration Database.
Voice-Processing Failure Messages
Table 12: Voice-Processing Failure Messages
T-Library Symbolic Name Description Switch

Error Code Error Code
231 TERR_DN_BUSY DN Is Busy 3009
232 TERR_DN_NO_ANSWER No Answer at DN 300A
234 TERR_CONN_ATMPT_FAIL Call Connection Attempt Has Failed 300C
Known Limitations
Several known limitations exist in the current Network T-Server for AT&T
environment:
1. Network T-Server uses load-sharing redundancy instead of the warm
standby or hot standby redundancy type. With load-sharing redundancy,
two or more Network T-Servers are attached to an SCP. The SCP
distributes the workload between the attached Network T-Servers. Since
hot standby redundancy is not supported, the configuration options
described in the “Backup-Synchronization Section” in Chapter 8 on
page 153, do not apply to this Network T-Server. See “Load Balancing” on
page 125 for more information.
128 Framework 8.1

2. Network T-Server will not attempt to connect to a backup Configuration

Server in a switchover scenario where the backup was configured for the
primary Configuration Server after the AT&T Network T-Server was
started. In this scenario, a manual restart of Network T-Server is required
in order to establish the connection to the backup Configuration Server.
3. During installation, configure Network T-Server as case sensitive to match
similar configuration in other Genesys products.
4. Network T-Server does not pass attached user data to a remote T-Server
when these two conditions occur simultaneously:

The joint method of handling user data for consultation calls is used.

A call is overflowed or transferred to a remote switch using the
External Routing feature.
Consultation calls retain all data when overflowed to a remote switch using
the External Call-Handling feature.
5. If Local Control Agent starts as a Windows NT service or as a UNIX
background process, do not use console output for the Application log.
6. To enable multi-site functionality, restart all T-Servers after adding the
ExtRouter feature in the T-Server license file. T-Server verifies any
modification to the license file at startup.
7. T-Server may incorrectly generate events in the following scenario:
 DN1 on Site 1 uses the External Routing feature to place a call to DN2
on remote Site 2.

DN2 answers the call sent from DN1.

DN2 uses the External Routing feature to perform a call transfer to
DN3 at Site 1.
 DN3 answers the call sent from DN2.

With the call answered, DN2 completes the transfer.

DN1 releases the call.
In this scenario, the T-Server at Site 1 may incorrectly generate events for
the call and report the incorrect status of DN1 to T-Server clients.

130 Framework 8.1

Chapter
7 Common Configuration
Options
Unless otherwise noted, the common configuration options that this chapter
describes are common to all Genesys server applications and applicable to any
Framework server component. This chapter includes the following sections:

Setting Configuration Options, page 131
 Mandatory Options, page 132

log Section, page 132

log-extended Section, page 146
 log-filter Section, page 148

log-filter-data Section, page 149

security Section, page 149
 sml Section, page 149

common Section, page 151
 Changes from 8.0 to 8.1, page 152
Note: Some server applications also support log options that are unique to
them. For descriptions of a particular application’s unique log options,
refer to the chapter/document about that application.
Setting Configuration Options

Unless specified otherwise, set common configuration options in the Options
of the Application object, using one of the following navigation paths:
• In Genesys Administrator—Application object > Options tab > Advanced
View (Options)
• In Configuration Manager—Application object > Properties dialog box >
Options tab

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options Mandatory Options
Warning! Configuration section names, configuration option names, and

predefined option values are case-sensitive. Type them in Genesys
Administrator or Configuration Manager exactly as they are
documented in this chapter.
Mandatory Options
You do not have to configure any common options to start Server applications.
log Section
This section must be called log.
verbose
Default Value: all
Valid Values:
all All log events (that is, log events of the Standard, Trace,
Interaction, and Debug levels) are generated.
debug The same as all.
trace Log events of the Trace level and higher (that is, log events of
the Standard, Interaction, and Trace levels) are generated, but
log events of the Debug level are not generated.
interaction Log events of the Interaction level and higher (that is, log
events of the Standard and Interaction levels) are generated,
but log events of the Trace and Debug levels are not generated.
standard Log events of the Standard level are generated, but log events
of the Interaction, Trace, and Debug levels are not generated.
none No output is produced.
Changes Take Effect: Immediately
Determines whether a log output is created. If it is, specifies the minimum
level of log events generated. The log events levels, starting with the highest
priority level, are Standard, Interaction, Trace, and Debug. See also “Log
Output Options” on page 138.
Note: For definitions of the Standard, Interaction, Trace, and Debug log
levels, refer to the Framework 8.0 Management Layer User’s Guide,
Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Help, or to Framework 8.0
Solution Control Interface Help.
132 Framework 8.1

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options log Section
buffering
Default Value: true
Valid Values:
true Enables buffering.
false Disables buffering.
Turns on/off operating system file buffering. The option is applicable only to
the stderr and stdout output (see page 138). Setting this option to true
increases the output performance.
Note: When buffering is enabled, there might be a delay before log

messages appear at the console.
segment
Default Value: false
Valid Values:
false No segmentation is allowed.
<number> KB or Sets the maximum segment size, in kilobytes. The minimum
<number> segment size is 100 KB.
<number> MB Sets the maximum segment size, in megabytes.
<number> hr Sets the number of hours for the segment to stay open. The
minimum number is 1 hour.
Specifies whether there is a segmentation limit for a log file. If there is, sets the
mode of measurement, along with the maximum size. If the current log
segment exceeds the size set by this option, the file is closed and a new one is
created. This option is ignored if log output is not configured to be sent to a log
file.
expire
Valid Values:
false No expiration; all generated segments are stored.
<number> file or Sets the maximum number of log files to store. Specify a
<number> number from 1–1000.
<number> day Sets the maximum number of days before log files are
deleted. Specify a number from 1–100.
Determines whether log files expire. If they do, sets the measurement for
determining when they expire, along with the maximum number of files
(segments) or days before the files are removed. This option is ignored if log
output is not configured to be sent to a log file.

Note: If an option’s value is set incorrectly—out of the range of valid

values— it will be automatically reset to 10.
keep-startup-file
Valid Values:
false No startup segment of the log is kept.
true A startup segment of the log is kept. The size of the segment
equals the value of the segment option.
<number> KB Sets the maximum size, in kilobytes, for a startup segment of
the log.
<number> MB Sets the maximum size, in megabytes, for a startup segment
of the log.
Changes Take Effect: After restart
Specifies whether a startup segment of the log, containing the initial T-Server
configuration, is to be kept. If it is, this option can be set to true or to a specific
size. If set to true, the size of the initial segment will be equal to the size of the
regular log segment defined by the segment option. The value of this option
will be ignored if segmentation is turned off (that is, if the segment option set to
false).
Note: This option applies only to T-Servers.
messagefile
Default Value: As specified by a particular application
Valid Values: <string>.lms (message file name)
Changes Take Effect: Immediately, if an application cannot find its *.lms file
at startup
Specifies the file name for application-specific log events. The name must be
valid for the operating system on which the application is running. The option
value can also contain the absolute path to the application-specific *.lms file.
Otherwise, an application looks for the file in its working directory.
Warning! An application that does not find its *.lms file at startup cannot
generate application-specific log events and send them to Message
Server.
134 Framework 8.1

message_format
Default Value: short
Valid Values:
short An application uses compressed headers when writing log records in
its log file.
full An application uses complete headers when writing log records in its
log file.
Specifies the format of log record headers that an application uses when
writing logs in the log file. Using compressed log record headers improves
application performance and reduces the log file’s size.
With the value set to short:
• A header of the log file or the log file segment contains information about
the application (such as the application name, application type, host type,
and time zone), whereas single log records within the file or segment omit
this information.
• A log message priority is abbreviated to Std, Int, Trc, or Dbg, for Standard,
Interaction, Trace, or Debug messages, respectively.
• The message ID does not contain the prefix GCTI or the application type ID.
A log record in the full format looks like this:
2002-05-07T18:11:38.196 Standard localhost cfg_dbserver GCTI-00-05060
Application started
A log record in the short format looks like this:
2002-05-07T18:15:33.952 Std 05060 Application started
Note: Whether the full or short format is used, time is printed in the format
specified by the time_format option.
time_convert
Default Value: Local
Valid Values:
local The time of log record generation is expressed as a local time, based
on the time zone and any seasonal adjustments. Time zone
information of the application’s host computer is used.
utc The time of log record generation is expressed as Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC).
Specifies the system in which an application calculates the log record time
when generating a log file. The time is converted from the time in seconds
since the Epoch (00:00:00 UTC, January 1, 1970).

time_format
Default Value: time
Valid Values:
time The time string is formatted according to the HH:MM:SS.sss (hours,
minutes, seconds, and milliseconds) format.
locale The time string is formatted according to the system’s locale.
ISO8601 The date in the time string is formatted according to the ISO 8601
format. Fractional seconds are given in milliseconds.
Specifies how to represent, in a log file, the time when an application generates
log records.
A log record’s time field in the ISO 8601 format looks like this:
2001-07-24T04:58:10.123
print-attributes
Valid Values:
true Attaches extended attributes, if any exist, to a log event sent to log
output.
false Does not attach extended attributes to a log event sent to log output.
Specifies whether the application attaches extended attributes, if any exist, to a
log event that it sends to log output. Typically, log events of the Interaction log
level and Audit-related log events contain extended attributes. Setting this
option to true enables audit capabilities, but negatively affects performance.
Genesys recommends enabling this option for Solution Control Server and
Configuration Server when using audit tracking. For other applications, refer
to Genesys 8.1 Combined Log Events Help to find out whether an application
generates Interaction-level and Audit-related log events; if it does, enable the
option only when testing new interaction scenarios.
check-point
Default Value: 1
Valid Values: 0–24
Specifies, in hours, how often the application generates a check point log
event, to divide the log into sections of equal time. By default, the application
generates this log event every hour. Setting the option to 0 prevents the
generation of check-point events.
136 Framework 8.1

memory
Default Value: No default value
Valid Values: <string> (memory file name)
Specifies the name of the file to which the application regularly prints a
snapshot of the memory output, if it is configured to do this (see “Log Output
Options” on page 138). The new snapshot overwrites the previously written
data. If the application terminates abnormally, this file will contain the latest
log messages. Memory output is not recommended for processors with a CPU
frequency lower than 600 MHz.
Note: If the file specified as the memory file is located on a network drive, an
application does not create a snapshot file (with the extension
*.memory.log).
memory-storage-size
Default Value: 2 MB
Valid Values:
<number> KB or <number> The size of the memory output, in kilobytes.
The minimum value is 128 KB.
<number> MB The size of the memory output, in megabytes.
The maximum value is 64 MB.
Changes Take Effect: When memory output is created
Specifies the buffer size for log output to the memory, if configured. See also
“Log Output Options” on page 138.
spool
Default Value: The application’s working directory
Valid Values: <path> (the folder, with the full path to it)
Specifies the folder, including full path to it, in which an application creates
temporary files related to network log output. If you change the option value
while the application is running, the change does not affect the currently open
network output.
compatible-output-priority
Valid Values:
true The log of the level specified by “Log Output Options” is sent to the
specified output.
false The log of the level specified by “Log Output Options” and higher
levels is sent to the specified output.

Specifies whether the application uses 6.x output logic. For example, you
configure the following options in the log section for a 6.x application and for
a 7.x application:
[log]
verbose = all
debug = file1
standard = file2
The log file content of a 6.x application is as follows:
• file1 contains Debug messages only.
• file2 contains Standard messages only.
The log file content of a 7.x application is as follows:
• file1 contains Debug, Trace, Interaction, and Standard messages.
• file2 contains Standard messages only.
If you set compatible-output-priority to true in the 7.x application, its log
file content will be the same as for the 6.x application.
Warning! Genesys does not recommend changing the default value of this
option unless you have specific reasons to use the 6.x log output
logic—that is, to mimic the output priority as implemented in
releases 6.x. Setting this option to true affects log consistency.
Log Output Options

To configure log outputs, set log level options (all, alarm, standard,
interaction, trace, and/or debug) to the desired types of log output (stdout,
stderr, network, memory, and/or [filename], for log file output).
You can use:
• One log level option to specify different log outputs.
• One log output type for different log levels.
• Several log output types simultaneously, to log events of the same or
different log levels.
You must separate the log output types by a comma when you are configuring
more than one output for the same log level. See “Examples” on page 142.
Warnings! • If you direct log output to a file on the network drive, an

application does not create a snapshot log file (with the
extension *.snapshot.log) in case it terminates abnormally.
• Directing log output to the console (by using the stdout or
stderr settings) can affect application performance. Avoid
using these log output settings in a production environment.
138 Framework 8.1

Note: The log output options are activated according to the setting of the
verbose configuration option.
all
Valid Values (log output types):
stdout Log events are sent to the Standard output (stdout).
stderr Log events are sent to the Standard error output (stderr).
network Log events are sent to Message Server, which can reside
anywhere on the network. Message Server stores the log events in
the Log Database.
Setting the all log level option to the network output enables an
application to send log events of the Standard, Interaction,
and Trace levels to Message Server. Debug-level log events are
neither sent to Message Server nor stored in the Log Database.
memory Log events are sent to the memory output on the local disk. This
is the safest output in terms of the application performance.
[filename] Log events are stored in a file with the specified name. If a path is
not specified, the file is created in the application’s working
directory.
Specifies the outputs to which an application sends all log events. The log
output types must be separated by a comma when more than one output is
configured. For example:
all = stdout, logfile
Note: To ease the troubleshooting process, consider using unique names for
log files that different applications generate.
alarm
network Log events are sent to Message Server, which resides anywhere
on the network, and Message Server stores the log events in the
Log Database.
[filename] Log events are stored in a file with the specified name. If a path
is not specified, the file is created in the application’s working
directory.

Specifies the outputs to which an application sends the log events of the Alarm
level. The log output types must be separated by a comma when more than one
output is configured. For example:
standard = stderr, network
standard
anywhere on the network. Message Server stores the log events
in the Log Database.
directory.
Specifies the outputs to which an application sends the log events of the
Standard level. The log output types must be separated by a comma when more
than one output is configured. For example:
standard = stderr, network
interaction
directory.
Specifies the outputs to which an application sends the log events of the
Interaction level and higher (that is, log events of the Standard and
Interaction levels). The log outputs must be separated by a comma when
more than one output is configured. For example:
interaction = stderr, network
140 Framework 8.1

trace
directory.
Specifies the outputs to which an application sends the log events of the Trace
level and higher (that is, log events of the Standard, Interaction, and Trace
levels). The log outputs must be separated by a comma when more than one
output is configured. For example:
trace = stderr, network
debug
directory.
Specifies the outputs to which an application sends the log events of the Debug
level and higher (that is, log events of the Standard, Interaction, Trace, and
Debug levels). The log output types must be separated by a comma when more
than one output is configured—for example:
debug = stderr, /usr/local/genesys/logfile
Note: Debug-level log events are never sent to Message Server or stored in
the Log Database.

Log File Extensions

You can use the following file extensions to identify log files that an
application creates for various types of output:
• *.log—Assigned to log files when you configure output to a log file. For
example, if you set standard = confservlog for Configuration Server, it
prints log messages into a text file called confservlog.<time_stamp>.log.
• *.qsp—Assigned to temporary (spool) files when you configure output to
the network but the network is temporarily unavailable. For example, if
you set standard = network for Configuration Server, it prints log messages
into a file called confserv.<time_stamp>.qsp during the time the network is
not available.
• *.snapshot.log—Assigned to files that contain the output snapshot when
you configure output to a log file. The file contains the last log messages
that an application generates before it terminates abnormally. For example,
if you set standard = confservlog for Configuration Server, it prints the last
log message into a file called confserv.<time_stamp>.snapshot.log in case
of failure.
Note: Provide *.snapshot.log files to Genesys Technical Support when

reporting a problem.
• *.memory.log—Assigned to log files that contain the memory output

snapshot when you configure output to memory and redirect the most
recent memory output to a file. For example, if you set standard = memory
and memory = confserv for Configuration Server, it prints the latest memory
output to a file called confserv.<time_stamp>.memory.log.
Examples
This section presents examples of a log section that you might configure for an
application when that application is operating in production mode and in two
lab modes, debugging and troubleshooting.
Production Mode Log Section

[log]
verbose = standard
standard = network, logfile
With this configuration, an application only generates the log events of the
Standard level and sends them to Message Server, and to a file named logfile,
which the application creates in its working directory. Genesys recommends
that you use this or a similar configuration in a production environment.
142 Framework 8.1

Warning! Directing log output to the console (by using the stdout or stderr
settings) can affect application performance. Avoid using these log
output settings in a production environment.
Lab Mode Log Section

[log]
verbose = all
all = stdout, /usr/local/genesys/logfile
trace = network
With this configuration, an application generates log events of the Standard,
Interaction, Trace, and Debug levels, and sends them to the standard output
and to a file named logfile, which the application creates in the
/usr/local/genesys/ directory. In addition, the application sends log events of
the Standard, Interaction, and Trace levels to Message Server. Use this
configuration to test new interaction scenarios in a lab environment.
Failure-Troubleshooting Log Section

[log]
verbose = all
standard = network
all = memory
memory = logfile
memory-storage-size = 32 MB
With this configuration, an application generates log events of the Standard
level and sends them to Message Server. It also generates log events of the
Standard, Interaction, Trace, and Debug levels, and sends them to the memory
output. The most current log is stored to a file named logfile, which the
application creates in its working directory. Increased memory storage allows
an application to save more of the log information generated before a failure.
Note: If you are running an application on UNIX, and you do not specify
any files in which to store the memory output snapshot, a core file that
the application produces before terminating contains the most current
application log. Provide the application’s core file to Genesys
Technical Support when reporting a problem.
Debug Log Options

The options in this section enable you to generate Debug logs containing
information about specific operations of an application.

x-conn-debug-open
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
0 Log records are not generated.
1 Log records are generated.
Generates Debug log records about “open connection” operations of the
application.
Warning! Use this option only when requested by Genesys Technical

Support.
x-conn-debug-select
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about “socket select” operations of the
application.

Support.
x-conn-debug-timers
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about the timer creation and deletion operations
of the application.

Support.
144 Framework 8.1

x-conn-debug-write
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about “write” operations of the application.

Support.
x-conn-debug-security
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about security-related operations, such as
Transport Layer Security and security certificates.

Support.
x-conn-debug-api
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about connection library function calls.

Support.

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options log-extended Section
x-conn-debug-dns
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about DNS operations.

Support.
x-conn-debug-all
Default Value: 0
Valid Values:
Generates Debug log records about open connection, socket select, timer
creation and deletion, write, security-related, and DNS operations, and
connection library function calls. This option is the same as enabling or
disabling all of the previous x-conn-debug-<op type> options.

Support.
log-extended Section
This section must be called log-extended.
level-reassign-<eventID>
Default Value: Default value of log event <eventID>
Valid Values:
alarm The log level of log event <eventID> is set to Alarm.
standard The log level of log event <eventID> is set to Standard.
interaction The log level of log event <eventID> is set to Interaction.
trace The log level of log event <eventID> is set to Trace.
debug The log level of log event <eventID> is set to Debug.
none Log event <eventID> is not recorded in a log.
Specifies a log level for log event <eventID> that is different than its default
level, or disables log event <eventID> completely. If no value is specified, the
146 Framework 8.1

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options log-extended Section
log event retains its default level. This option is useful when you want to
customize the log level for selected log events.
These options can be deactivated with the option level-reassign-disable.
Warning! Use caution when making these changes in a production

environment.
Depending on the log configuration, changing the log level to a
higher priority may cause the log event to be logged more often or
to a greater number of outputs. This could affect system
performance.
Likewise, changing the log level to a lower priority may cause the
log event to be not logged at all, or to be not logged to specific
outputs, thereby losing important information. The same applies to
any alarms associated with that log event.
In addition to the preceding warning, take note of the following:

• Logs can be customized only by release 7.6 or later applications.
• When the log level of a log event is changed to any level except none, it is
subject to the other settings in the [log] section at its new level. If set to
none, it is not logged and is therefore not subject to any log configuration.
• Using this feature to change the log level of a log changes only its priority;
it does not change how that log is treated by the system. For example,
increasing the priority of a log to Alarm level does not mean that an alarm
will be associated with it.
• Each application in a High Availability (HA) pair can define its own
unique set of log customizations, but the two sets are not synchronized
with each other. This can result in different log behavior depending on
which application is currently in primary mode.
• This feature is not the same as a similar feature in Universal Routing
Server (URS) release 7.2 or later. In this Framework feature, the priority of
log events are customized. In the URS feature, the priority of debug
messages only are customized. Refer to the Universal Routing Reference
Manual for more information about the URS feature.
• You cannot customize any log event that is not in the unified log record
format. Log events of the Alarm, Standard, Interaction, and Trace levels
feature the same unified log record format.
Example
This is an example of using customized log level settings, subject to the
following log configuration:
[log]
verbose=interaction
all=stderr

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options log-filter Section
interaction=log_file
standard=network
Before the log levels of the log are changed:

• Log event 1020, with default level standard, is output to stderr and
log_file, and sent to Message Server.
• Log event 2020, with default level standard, is output to stderr and
log_file, and sent to Message Server.
• Log event 3020, with default level trace, is output to stderr.
• Log event 4020, with default level debug, is output to stderr.
Extended log configuration section:
[log-extended]
level-reassign-1020=none
level-reassign-2020=interaction
level-reassign-3020=interaction
level-reassign-4020=standard
After the log levels are changed:
• Log event 1020 is disabled and not logged.
• Log event 2020 is output to stderr and log_file.
• Log event 3020 is output to stderr and log_file.
• Log event 4020 is output to stderr and log_file, and sent to Message
Server.
level-reassign-disable
Valid Values: true, false
When this option is set to true, the original (default) log level of all log events
in the [log-extended] section are restored. This option is useful when you want
to use the default levels, but not delete the customization statements.
log-filter Section
The log-filter section contains configuration options used to define the
default treatment of filtering data in log output. This section contains one
configuration option, default-filter-type. Refer to the chapter “Hide
Selected Data in Logs” in the Genesys 8.x Security Deployment Guide for
complete information about this option.
148 Framework 8.1

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options log-filter-data Section
log-filter-data Section
The log-filter-data section contains configuration options used to define the
treatment of filtering data in log output on a key-by-key basis. This section
contains one configuration option in the form of <key name>. Refer to the
chapter “Hide Selected Data in Logs” in the Genesys 8.0 Security Deployment
Guide for complete information about this option.
security Section
The security section contains configuration options used to specify security
elements for your system. In addition to other options that may be required by
your application, this section contains the configuration option disable-rbac,
which is used to enable or disable Role-Based Access Control for an
application. Refer to the chapter “Role-Based Access Control” in the Genesys
8.x Security Deployment Guide for complete information about this option.
sml Section
This section must be called sml.
Options in this section are defined in the Annex of the Application object, as
follows:
• in Genesys Administrator—Application object > Options tab > Advanced
View (Annex)
• in Configuration Manager— Application object > Properties dialog box >
Annex tab
Warning! Use the first three options in this section (heartbeat-period,

heartbeat-period-thread-class-<n>, and hangup-restart) with
great care, and only with those applications of which support for
this functionality has been announced. Failure to use these options
properly could result in unexpected behavior, from ignoring the
options to an unexpected restart of the application.
heartbeat-period
Default Value: None
Valid Values:
0 This method of detecting an unresponsive application is not
used by this application.
3-604800 Length of timeout, in seconds; equivalent to 3 seconds–7 days.

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options sml Section
Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, in which heartbeat

messages are expected from an application. If Local Control Agent (LCA)
does not receive a heartbeat message from the application within this period, it
assumes the application is not responding and carries out corrective action.
This option can also be used to specify the maximum heartbeat interval for
threads registered with class zero (0). This thread class is reserved for use by
the Management Layer only.
If this option is not configured or is set to zero (0), heartbeat detection is not
used by this application.
heartbeat-period-thread-class-<n>
Default Value: None
Valid Values:
0 Value specified by heartbeat-period in application is used.
3-604800 Length of timeout, in seconds; equivalent to 3 seconds–7 days.
Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, in which heartbeat
messages are expected from a thread of class <n> registered by an application.
If a heartbeat message from the thread is not received within this period, the
thread is assumed to be not responding, and therefore, the application is unable
to provide service.
If this option is not configured or is set to zero (0), but the application has
registered one or more threads of class <n>, the value specified by the value of
heartbeat-period for the application will also be applied to these threads.
Refer to application-specific documentation to determine what thread classes,
if any, are used.
hangup-restart
Default Value: true
If set to true (the default), specifies that LCA is to restart the unresponsive
application immediately, without any further interaction from Solution Control
Server.
If set to false, specifies that LCA is only to generate a notification that the
application has stopped responding.
suspending-wait-timeout
Default Value: 10
Valid Values: 5-600
Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after the Stop Graceful command is issued to
an application during which the status of the application should change to
150 Framework 8.1

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options common Section
Suspending if the application supports graceful shutdown. If the status of the

application does not change to Suspending before the timeout expires, it is
assumed that the application does not support graceful shutdown, and it is
stopped ungracefully.
Use this option if you are unsure whether the Application supports graceful
shutdown.
Note: Genesys recommends that you do not set this option for any
Management Layer component (Configuration Server, Message
Server, Solution Control Server, or SNMP Master Agent) or any DB
Server. These components by definition do not support graceful
shutdown, so this option is not required.
common Section
This section must be called common.
enable-async-dns
Default Value: off
Valid Values:
off Disables asynchronous processing of DNS requests.
on Enables asynchronous processing of DNS requests.
Enables the asynchronous processing of DNS requests such as, for example,
host-name resolution.
Warnings! • Use this option only when requested by Genesys Technical

Support.
• Use this option only with T-Servers.
rebind-delay
Default Value: 10
Specifies the delay, in seconds, between socket-bind operations that are being
executed by the server. Use this option if the server has not been able to
successfully occupy a configured port.

Support.

Chapter 7: Common Configuration Options Changes from 8.0 to 8.1
Changes from 8.0 to 8.1

There are no changes in common configuration options between 8.0 and 8.1
releases.
152 Framework 8.1

Chapter
8 T-Server Common
Configuration Options
This chapter describes the configuration options that are generally common to
all T-Server types, with some exceptions noted. It contains the following
sections:

Setting Configuration Options, page 153
 Mandatory Options, page 154

TServer Section, page 154

license Section, page 159
 agent-reservation Section, page 162

extrouter Section, page 163

backup-sync Section, page 174
 call-cleanup Section, page 176

Translation Rules Section, page 178
 security Section, page 178
 Timeout Value Format, page 178

Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1, page 179
T-Server also supports common log options described in Chapter 7, “Common
Configuration Options,” on page 131.
Setting Configuration Options

Unless specified otherwise, set T-Server common configuration options in the
Options of the Application object, using one of the following navigation paths:
• In Genesys Administrator—Application object > Options tab > Advanced
View (Options)
• In Configuration Manager—Application object > Properties dialog box >
Options tab

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options Mandatory Options
Mandatory Options
Except as noted for certain environments, the configuration of common
options is not required for basic T-Server operation.
TServer Section
The TServer section contains the configuration options that are used to support
the core features common to all T-Servers.
This section must be called TServer.
ani-distribution
Default Value: inbound-calls-only
Valid Values: inbound-calls-only, all-calls, suppressed
Controls the distribution of the ANI information in TEvent messages. When
this option is set to all-calls, the ANI attribute will be reported for all calls for
which it is available. When this option is set to suppressed, the ANI attribute
will not be reported for any calls. When this option is set to
inbound-calls-only, the ANI attribute will be reported for inbound calls only.
background-processing
Default Value: true
When set to true, T-Server processes all client requests in the background,
giving higher priority to the rest of the messages. This ensures that it processes
these messages without any significant delay.
With Background Processing functionality enabled, T-Server processes all
switch messages immediately and waits until there are no switch messages
before processing the message queue associated with T-Server client requests.
T-Server reads all connection sockets immediately and places client requests in
the input buffer, which prevents T-Server clients from disconnecting because
of configured timeouts.
When T-Server processes client requests from the message queue, requests are
processed in the order in which T-Server received them.
When set to false, T-Server processes multiple requests from one T-Server
client before proceeding to the requests from another T-Server client, and so
on.
154 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options TServer Section
background-timeout
Default Value: 60 msec
Valid Values: See “Timeout Value Format” on page 178.
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits before processing client requests
in background mode. You must set the background-processing option to true
in order for this option to take effect.
check-tenant-profile
Changes Take Effect: For the next connected client
When set to true, T-Server only allows a client to register if the client
provides the correct name and password of a T-Server Tenant. If the client
provides the Tenant name concatenated with a slash (/) and the Tenant
password for the Tenant to which T-Server belongs as the value of
AttributeApplicationPassword in the TRegisterClient request, T-Server
allows that client to register DNs that are included in the switch configuration
in the Configuration Database, but it does not allow the client to register DNs
that are not included in the switch configuration.
consult-user-data
Default Value: separate
Valid Values:
separate Stores user data for original and consultation calls in separate
structures. The data attached to the original call is available for
review or changes only to the parties of that call. The data
attached to the consultation call is available only to the parties of
the consultation call.
inherited Copies user data from an original call to a consultation call when
the consultation call is created; thereafter, stores user data
separately for the original and the consultation call. Changes to
the original call’s user data are not available to the parties of the
consultation call, and vice versa.
joint Stores user data for an original call and a consultation call in one
structure. The user data structure is associated with the original
call, but the parties of both the original and consultation calls can
see and make changes to the common user data.
Changes Take Effect: For the next consultation call created
Specifies the method for handling user data in a consultation call.

Note: A T-Server client can also specify the consult-user-data mode in the
Extensions attribute ConsultUserData key for a conference or
transfer request. If it is specified, the method of handling user data is
based on the value of the ConsultUserData key-value pair of the
request and takes precedence over the T-Server consult-user-data
option. If it is not specified in the client request, the value specified in
the consult-user-data option applies.
customer-id
Default Value: No default value. (A value must be specified for a multi-tenant
environment.)
Valid Values: Any character string
Identifies the T-Server customer. You must set this option to the name of the
tenant that is using this T-Server. You must specify a value for this option if
you are working in a multi-tenant environment.
Note: Do not configure the customer-id option for single-tenant

environments.
dn-scope
Default Value: undefined
Valid Values: undefined, switch, office, tenant
Related Feature: “Switch Partitioning” on page 82
Specifies whether DNs associated with the Switch, Switching Office, or
Tenant objects will be considered in the T-Server monitoring scope, enabling
T-Server to report calls to or from those DNs as internal.
With a value of tenant, all DNs associated with the switches that are within
the Tenant will be in the T-Server monitoring scope. With a value of office,
all DNs associated with the switches that are within the Switching Office will
be in the T-Server monitoring scope. With a value of switch, all DNs
associated with the Switch will be in the T-Server monitoring scope.
With a value of undefined (the default), pre-8.x T-Server behavior applies and
the switch partitioning is not turned on.
Note: Setting the option to a value of office or tenant, which requires

T-Server to monitor a large set of configuration data, may negatively
affect T-Server performance.
156 Framework 8.1

log-trace-flags
Default Value: +iscc, +cfg$dn, -cfgserv, +passwd, +udata, -devlink, -sw,
-req, -callops, -conn, -client
Valid Values (in any combination):
+/-iscc Turns on/off the writing of information about Inter Server Call
Control (ISCC) transactions.
+/-cfg$dn Turns on/off the writing of information about DN
configuration.
+/-cfgserv Turns on/off the writing of messages from Configuration
Server.
+/-passwd Turns on/off the writing of AttributePassword in TEvents.
+/-udata Turns on/off the writing of attached data.
+/-devlink Turns on/off the writing of information about the link used to
send CTI messages to the switch (for multilink environments).
+/-sw Reserved by Genesys Engineering.
+/-req Reserved by Genesys Engineering.
+/-callops Reserved by Genesys Engineering.
+/-conn Reserved by Genesys Engineering.
+/-client Turns on/off the writing of additional information about the
client’s connection.
Specifies—using a space-, comma- or semicolon-separated list—the types of
information that are written to the log files.
management-port
Default Value: 0
Valid Values: 0 or any valid TCP/IP port
Changes Take Effect: After T-Server is restarted
Specifies the TCP/IP port that management agents use to communicate with
T-Server. If set to 0 (zero), this port is not used.
merged-user-data
Default Value: main-only
Valid Values:
main-only T-Server attaches user data from the remaining call only.
merged-only T-Server attaches user data from the merging call.
merged-over-main T-Server attaches user data from the remaining and the
merging call. In the event of equal keys, T-Server uses data
from the merging call.
main-over-merged T-Server attaches data from the remaining and the merging
call. In the event of equal keys, T-Server uses data from the
remaining call.

Specifies the data that is attached to the resulting call after a call transfer,
conference, or merge completion.
Note: The option setting does not affect the resulting data for merging calls
if the consult-user-data option is set to joint. (See
“consult-user-data” on page 155.)
propagated-call-type
Related Feature: “Switch Partitioning” on page 82
Determines what T-Server reports as the value of the CallType attribute in
events related to calls that have been synchronized with another site via ISCC,
as follows:
• When set to false, T-Server reports in events related to calls that have
been synchronized with another site via ISCC the same value for the
CallType attribute as it did in pre-8.0 releases and adds the new
PropagatedCallType attribute with the value of the CallType attribute at the
origination site. This provides backward compatibility with existing
T-Server clients.
• When set to true, T-Server reports in events related to calls that have been
synchronized with another site via ISCC the same value for the CallType
attribute as at the origination site, and adds the new LocalCallType attribute
with the same value as CallType in pre-8.0 releases.
server-id
Default Value: An integer equal to the value ApplicationDBID as reported by
Configuration Server
Valid Values: Any integer from 0–16383
Specifies the Server ID that T-Server uses to generate Connection IDs and
other unique identifiers. In a multi-site environment, you must assign each
T-Server a unique Server ID, in order to avoid confusion in reporting
applications and T-Server behavior.
Configuration of this option is necessary for Framework environments in
which there are two or more instances of the Configuration Database.
Note: If you do not specify a value for this option, T-Server populates it with
the ApplicationDBID as reported by Configuration Server. Each data
object in the Configuration Database is assigned a separate DBID that
maintains a unique Server ID for each T-Server configured in the
database.
158 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options license Section
Warning! Genesys does not recommend using multiple instances of the

Configuration Database.
user-data-limit
Default Value: 16000
Specifies the maximum size (in bytes) of user data in a packed format.
Note: When T-Server works in mixed 8.x/7.x/6.x environment, the value of

this option must not exceed the default value of 16000 bytes;
otherwise, 6.x T-Server clients might fail.
license Section
The License section contains the configuration options that are used to
configure T-Server licenses. They set the upper limit of the seat-related DN
licenses (tserver_sdn) that T-Server tries to check out from a license file. See
“License Checkout” on page 160.
This section must be called license.
Notes: • T-Server also supports the license-file option described in the

Genesys Licensing Guide.
• The license section is not applicable to Network T-Server for
DTAG.
• On selected platforms, the limitation of 9999 licenses may no
longer apply. Use values greater than 9999 only when instructed by
Genesys Technical Support.
If you use two or more T-Servers, and they share licenses, you must configure
the following options in the license section of the T-Servers.
num-of-licenses
Default Value: 0 or max (all available licenses)
Valid Values: String max or any integer from 0–9999
Specifies how many DN licenses T-Server checks out. T-Server treats a value
of 0 (zero) the same as it treats max—that is, it checks out all available
licenses.
The sum of all num-of-licenses values for all concurrently deployed
T-Servers must not exceed the number of seat-related DN licenses
(tserver_sdn) in the corresponding license file. The primary and backup

T-Servers share the same licenses, and therefore they need to be counted only
once. T-Server checks out the number of licenses indicated by the value for
this option, regardless of the number actually in use.
num-sdn-licenses
Default Value: 0 or max (all DN licenses are seat-related)
Valid Values: String max (equal to the value of num-of-licenses), or any
integer from 0–9999
Specifies how many seat-related licenses T-Server checks out. A value of 0
(zero) means that T-Server does not grant control of seat-related DNs to any
client, and it does not look for seat-related DN licenses at all.
The sum of all num-sdn-licenses values for all concurrently deployed
T-Servers must not exceed the number of seat-related DN licenses
(tserver_sdn) in the corresponding license file. The primary and backup
T-Servers share the same licenses, and therefore they need to be counted only
once. T-Server checks out the number of licenses indicated by the value for this
option, regardless of the number actually in use.
Notes: • For Network T-Servers, Genesys recommends setting this option to

0.
• Be sure to configure in the Configuration Database all the DNs that
agents use (Extensions and ACD Positions) and that T-Server
should control. For further information, see Chapter 7, “DNs and
Agent Logins,” page 36.
License Checkout
Table 13 shows how to determine the number of seat-related DN licenses that
T-Server attempts to check out. See the examples on page 161.
Table 13: License Checkout Rules
Options Settingsa License Checkoutb
num-of-licenses num-sdn-licenses Seat-related DN

licenses
max (or 0) max all available
max (or 0) x x
max (or 0) 0 0
x max x
160 Framework 8.1

Table 13: License Checkout Rules (Continued)
Options Settingsa License Checkoutb
num-of-licenses num-sdn-licenses Seat-related DN

licenses
x y min (y, x)
x 0 0
a. In this table, the following conventions are used: x and y - are positive integers;
max is the maximum number of licenses that T-Server can check out; min (y, x)
is the lesser of the two values defined by y and x, respectively.
b. The License Checkout column shows the number of licenses that T-Server at-
tempts to check out. The actual number of licenses will depend on the licenses’
availability at the time of checkout, and it is limited to 9999.
Examples
This section presents examples of option settings in the license section.
Example 1
If... Then...
Options Settings License File Settings License Checkout
num-of-licenses = max tserver_sdn = 500 500 seat-related DNs
num-sdn-licenses = max
Example 2
If... Then...
num-of-licenses = 1000 tserver_sdn = 500 500 seat-related DNs
num-sdn-licenses = max

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options agent-reservation Section
Example 3
If... Then...
num-of-licenses = 1000 tserver_sdn = 600 400 seat-related DNs
num-sdn-licenses = 400
Example 4
If... Then...
num-of-licenses = max tserver_sdn = 5000 1000 seat-related DNs
num-sdn-licenses = 1000
agent-reservation Section
The agent-reservation section contains the configuration options that are
used to customize the T-Server Agent Reservation feature. See “Agent
Reservation” on page 26 section for details on this feature.
This section must be called agent-reservation.
Note: The Agent Reservation functionality is currently a software-only

feature that is used to coordinate multiple client applications. This
feature does not apply to multiple direct or ACD-distributed calls.
collect-lower-priority-requests
Default Value: true
Specifies whether an agent reservation request is collected, depending on its
priority during the time interval specified by the request-collection-time
configuration option. When set to false, during the request-collection-time
interval T-Server collects reservation requests of the highest priority only,
rejecting newly submitted requests that have a lower priority or rejecting all
previously submitted requests if a request with a higher priority arrives. When
set to true (the default), agent reservation requests are collected as they were
in pre-8.x releases.
162 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options extrouter Section
reject-subsequent-request
Default Value: true
Valid Values:
true T-Server rejects subsequent requests.
false A subsequent request prolongs the current reservation made by the
same client application for the same agent.
Specifies whether T-Server rejects subsequent requests from the same client
application, for an agent reservation for the same Agent object that is currently
reserved.
Note: Genesys does not recommend setting this option to false in a

multi-site environment in which remote locations use the
Agent-Reservation feature.
request-collection-time
Specifies the interval that agent reservation requests are collected before a
reservation is granted. During this interval, agent reservation requests are
delayed, in order to balance successful reservations between client applications
(for example, Universal Routing Servers).
reservation-time
Specifies the default interval for which a an Agent DN is reserved. During this
interval, the agent cannot be reserved again.
extrouter Section
The extrouter section contains the configuration options that are used to
support multi-site environments with the Inter Server Call Control (ISCC)
feature. The configuration options in this section of the document are grouped
with related options that support the same functionality, as follows:

ISCC Transaction Options, page 166

Transfer Connect Service Options, page 170

ISCC/COF Options, page 170
 Event Propagation Options, page 173

Number Translation Option, page 174

GVP Integration Option, page 174

This configuration section must be called extrouter.

For a description of the ways in which T-Server supports multi-site
configurations and for an explanation of the configuration possibilities for a
multi-site operation, see the “Multi-Site Support” chapter.
Note: In a multi-site environment, you must configure the timeout,

cast-type, and default-dn options with the same value for both the
primary and backup T-Servers. If you do not do this, the value
specified for the backup T-Server overrides the value specified for the
primary T-Server.
match-call-once
Default Value: true
Valid Values:
true ISCC does not process (match) an inbound call that has already been
processed (matched).
false ISCC processes (attempts to match) a call as many times as it arrives
at an ISCC resource or multi-site-transfer target.
Specifies how many times ISCC processes an inbound call when it arrives at
an ISCC resource. When set to false, ISCC processes (attempts to match) the
call even if it has already been processed.
Note: Genesys does not recommend changing the default value of the
match-call-once option to false unless you have specific reasons.
Setting this option to false may lead to excessive or inconsistent call
data updates.
reconnect-tout
Default Value: 5 sec
Changes Take Effect: At the next reconnection attempt
Specifies the time interval after which a remote T-Server attempts to connect
to this T-Server after an unsuccessful attempt or a lost connection. The number
of attempts is unlimited. At startup, T-Server immediately attempts the first
connection, without this timeout.
164 Framework 8.1

report-connid-changes
Valid Values:
true EventPartyChanged is generated.
false EventPartyChanged is not generated.
Specifies whether the destination T-Server generates EventPartyChanged for
the incoming call when the resulting ConnID attribute is different from the
ConnID attribute of an instance of the same call at the origination location.
use-data-from
Default Value: current
Valid Values:
active The values of UserData and ConnID attributes are taken from the
consultation call.
original The values of UserData and ConnID attributes are taken from the
original call.
active-data- The value of the UserData attribute is taken from the consultation
original-call call and the value of ConnID attribute is taken from the original
call.
current If the value of current is specified, the following occurs:
• Before the transfer or conference is completed, the UserData
and ConnID attributes are taken from the consultation call.
• After the transfer or conference is completed,
EventPartyChanged is generated, and the UserData and ConnID
are taken from the original call.
Specifies the call from which the values for the UserData and ConnID
attributes are taken for a consultation call that is routed or transferred to a
remote location.
Note: For compatibility with the previous T-Server releases, you can use the
values consult, main, and consult-user-data for this option. These
are aliases for active, original, and current, respectively.

ISCC Transaction Options

cast-type
Default Value: route, route-uui, reroute, direct-callid, direct-uui,
direct-network-callid, direct-notoken, direct-digits,
direct-ani, dnis-pool, pullback
Valid Values: route, route-uui, reroute, direct-callid, direct-uui,
direct-network-callid, direct-notoken, direct-digits,
direct-ani, dnis-pool, pullback
Changes Take Effect: For the next request for the remote service
Specifies—using a space-, comma- or semicolon-separated list—the routing
types that can be performed for this T-Server.
The valid values provide for a range of mechanisms that the ISCC feature can
support with various T-Servers, in order to pass call data along with calls
between locations.
Because switches of different types provide calls with different sets of
information parameters, some values might not work with your T-Server. See
Table 3 on page 61 for information about supported transaction types by a
specific T-Server. The “Multi-Site Support” chapter also provides detailed
descriptions of all transaction types.
Notes: For compatibility with the previous T-Server releases, you can use the
direct value for this option. This is an alias for direct-callid.
An alias, route-notoken, has been added to the route value.
default-dn
Valid Values: Any DN
Specifies the DN to which a call is routed when a Destination DN
(AttributeOtherDN) is not specified in the client’s request for routing. If neither
this option nor the client’s request contains the destination DN, the client
receives EventError.
Note: This option is used only for requests with route types route,
route-uui, direct-callid, direct-network-callid, direct-uui,
direct-notoken, direct-digits, and direct-ani.
166 Framework 8.1

direct-digits-key
Default Value: CDT_Track_Num
Valid Values: Any valid key name of a key-value pair from the UserData
attribute
Specifies the name of a key from the UserData attribute that contains a string
of digits that are used as matching criteria for remote service requests with the
direct-digits routing type.
Note: For compatibility with the previous T-Server releases, this

configuration option has an alias value of cdt-udata-key.
dn-for-unexpected-calls
Specifies a default DN for unexpected calls arriving on an External Routing
Point.
network-request-timeout
Changes Take Effect: For the next network request
For a premise T-Server, this option specifies the time interval that the premise
T-Server waits for a response, after relaying a TNetwork<...> request to the
Network T-Server. For a Network T-Server, this option specifies the time
interval that the Network T-Server waits for a response from an SCP (Service
Control Point), after initiating the processing of the request by the SCP.
When the allowed time expires, the T-Server cancels further processing of the
request and generates EventError.
register-attempts
Default Value: 5
Valid Values: Any positive integer
Changes Take Effect: For the next registration
Specifies the number of attempts that T-Server makes to register a dedicated
External Routing Point.

register-tout
Changes Take Effect: For the next registration
Specifies the time interval after which T-Server attempts to register a dedicated
External Routing Point. Counting starts when the attempt to register a Routing
Point fails.
request-tout
Changes Take Effect: For the next request for remote service
Specifies the time interval that a T-Server at the origination location waits for a
notification of routing service availability from the destination location.
Counting starts when the T-Server sends a request for remote service to the
destination site.
resource-allocation-mode
Default Value: circular
Valid Values:
home T-Server takes an alphabetized (or numerically sequential) list of
configured DNs and reserves the first available DN from the top of
the list for each new request. For example, if the first DN is not
available, the second DN is allocated for a new request. If the first
DN is freed by the time the next request comes, the first DN is
allocated for this next request.
circular T-Server takes the same list of configured DNs, but reserves a
subsequent DN for each subsequent request. For example, when the
first request comes, T-Server allocates the first DN; when the second
request comes, T-Server allocates the second DN; and so on.
T-Server does not reuse the first DN until reaching the end of the DN
list.
Specifies the manner in which T-Server allocates resources (that is, DNs of the
External Routing Point type and Access Resources with the Resource Type
set to dnis) for multi-site transaction requests.
resource-load-maximum
Default Value: 0
Valid Values: Any positive integer
Specifies the maximum number of ISCC routing transactions that can be
concurrently processed at a single DN of the External Routing Point route
type. After a number of outstanding transactions at a particular DN of the
168 Framework 8.1

External Routing Point type reaches the specified number, T-Server

considers the DN not available. Any subsequent request for this DN is queued
until the number of outstanding transactions decreases. A value of 0 (zero)
means that no limitation is set to the number of concurrent transactions at a
single External Routing Point. In addition, the 0 value enables T-Server to
perform load balancing of all incoming requests among all available External
Routing Points, in order to minimize the load on each DN.
route-dn
Specifies the DN that serves as a Routing Point for the route transaction type
in the multiple-to-one access mode.
timeout
Changes Take Effect: For the next request for remote service
Specifies the time interval that the destination T-Server waits for a call routed
from the origination location. Counting starts when this T-Server notifies the
requesting T-Server about routing service availability. The timeout must be
long enough to account for possible network delays in call arrival.
use-implicit-access-numbers
Determines whether an External Routing Point in which at least one access
number is specified is eligible for use as a resource for calls coming from
switches for which an access number is not specified in the External Routing
Point. If this option is set to false, the External Routing Point is not eligible
for use as a resource for calls coming from such switches. If this option is set
to true, an implicit access number for the External Routing Point, composed
of the switch access code and the DN number of the External Routing Point,
will be used.
Note: If an External Routing Point does not have an access number

specified, this option will not affect its use.

Transfer Connect Service Options

tcs-queue
Valid Values: Any valid DN number
Specifies the TCS DN number to which a call, processed by the TCS feature, is
dialed after the originating external router obtains an access number. This
option applies only if the tcs-use option is activated.
tcs-use
Default Value: never
Valid Values:
never The TCS feature is not used.
always The TCS feature is used for every call.
app-defined In order to use the TCS feature for a multi-site call transfer
request, a client application must add a key-value pair with a
TC-type key and a nonempty string value to the UserData
attribute of the request.
Specifies whether the Transfer Connect Service (TCS) feature is used.
Note: For compatibility with the previous T-Server releases, you can use the
value up-app-depended for this option. This is an alias for
app-defined.
ISCC/COF Options
cof-ci-defer-create
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits for call data from the switch
before generating a negative response for a call data request from a remote
T-Server. If T-Server detects the matching call before this timeout expires, it
sends the requested data. This option applies only if the cof-feature option is
set to true.
170 Framework 8.1

cof-ci-defer-delete
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits before deleting call data that
might be overflowed. If set to 0, deletion deferring is disabled. This option
applies only if the cof-feature option is set to true.
cof-ci-req-tout
Changes Take Effect: For the next COF operation
Specifies the time interval during which T-Server will wait for call data
requested with respect to a call originated at another site. After T-Server sends
the call data request to remote T-Servers, all events related to this call will be
suspended until either the requested call data is received or the specified
timeout expires. This option applies only if the cof-feature option is set to
true.
cof-ci-wait-all
Valid Values:
true T-Server waits for responses from all T-Servers that might have the
requested call data before updating the call data with the latest
information.
false T-Server updates the call data with the information received from the
first positive response.
Specifies whether T-Server, after sending a request for matching call data,
waits for responses from other T-Servers before updating the call data (such as
CallHistory, ConnID, and UserData) for a potentially overflowed call. The
waiting period is specified by the cof-ci-req-tout and cof-rci-tout options.
This option applies only if the cof-feature option is set to true.
cof-feature
Enables or disables the Inter Server Call Control/Call Overflow (ISCC/COF)
feature.

cof-rci-tout
Changes Take Effect: For the next COF operation
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits for call data from other
T-Servers’ transactions. Counting starts when cof-ci-req-tout expires. This
option applies only if the cof-feature option is set to true.
local-node-id
Default Value: 0
Valid Values: 0 or any positive integer
This option, if enabled, checks all networked calls against the specified
NetworkNodeID (the identity of the switch to which the call initially arrived). If
the NetworkNodeID is the same as the value of this option, the request for call
information is not sent. The default value of 0 disables the functionality of this
option. To establish an appropriate NetworkNodeID, specify a value other than
the default. This option applies only if the cof-feature option is set to true.
Note: This option applies only to T-Server for Nortel Communication Server
2000/2100.
default-network-call-id-matching
Valid Values: See the “T-Server-Specific Configuration Options” chapter for an
option description for your T-Server
When a value for this option is specified, T-Server uses the NetworkCallID
attribute for the ISCC/COF call matching.
To activate this feature, the cof-feature option must be set to true.
Note: SIP Server and several T-Servers support the NetworkCallID attribute
for the ISCC/COF call matching in a way that requires setting this
option to a specific value. For information about the option value that
is specific for your T-Server, see the “T-Server-Specific Configuration
Options” chapter of your T-Server Deployment Guide.
172 Framework 8.1

Event Propagation Options

compound-dn-representation
Default Value: true
Specifies which format T-Server uses to represent a DN when reporting an
OtherDN or ThirdPartyDN attribute in event propagation messages.
When set to true, the <switch>::DN (compound) format is used. This option
value supports backward compatibility for pre-8.x T-Server ISCC/EPP
functionality and is provided for multi-site deployments where the same DNs
are configured under several switches.
When set to false, the DN (non-compound) format is used. This option value
ensures more transparent reporting of OtherDN or ThirdPartyDN attributes and is
recommended for all single-site deployments, as well as for multi-site
deployments that do not have the same DNs configured under several switches.
This option applies only if the event-propagation option is set to list.
Note: Local DNs are always represented in the non-compound (DN) form.
epp-tout
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval during which T-Server attempts to resolve race
conditions that may occur in deployments that use switch partitioning or
intelligent trunks. This option applies only if the event-propagation option is
set to list.
Note: If the time interval is not long enough to account for possible network
switching delays, T-Server may produce duplicated events, such as
events that are propagated by the ISCC and generated locally.
event-propagation
Default Value: list
Valid Values:
list Changes in user data and party events are propagated to remote
locations through call distribution topology.
off The feature is disabled. Changes in user data and party events are not
propagated to remote locations.
Specifies whether the Event Propagation feature is enabled.

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options backup-sync Section
Number Translation Option

inbound-translator-<n>
Valid Value: Any valid name
Specifies the name of another configuration section as the value for the
inbound-translator option. For example,
inbound-translator-1 = ani-translator
where ani-translator is the name of the configuration that describes the
translation rules for inbound numbers.
GVP Integration Option

handle-vsp
Default Value: no
Valid Values:
requests ISCC will process and adjust requests related to this DN and
containing a Location attribute before submitting them to the
service provider.
events ISCC will process and adjust events received from the service
provider and containing a Location attribute before distributing
them to T-Server clients.
all ISCC will process and adjust both events and requests.
no No ISCC processing of such requests and events takes place.
Specifies the way ISCC handles events from, and requests to, an external
service provider registered for a DN using the AddressType attribute set to VSP.
backup-sync Section
The backup-synchronization section contains the configuration options that are
used to support a high-availability (hot standby redundancy type)
configuration.
This section must be called backup-sync.
Note: These options apply only to T-Servers that support the hot standby
redundancy type.
174 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options backup-sync Section
addp-remote-timeout
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that the redundant T-Server waits for a response
from this T-Server after sending a polling signal. The default value of 0 (zero)
disables the functionality of this option. To establish an appropriate timeout,
specify a value other than the default. This option applies only if the protocol
option is set to addp.
addp-timeout
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that this T-Server waits for a response from another
T-Server after sending a polling signal. The default value of 0 (zero) disables
the functionality of this option. To establish an appropriate timeout, specify a
value other than the default. This option applies only if the protocol option is
set to addp.
addp-trace
Default Value: off
Valid Values:
off, false, no No trace (default).
local, on, true, yes Trace on this T-Server side only.
remote Trace on the redundant T-Server side only.
full, both Full trace (on both sides).
Specifies whether addp messages are traced in a log file, to what level the trace
is performed, and in which direction. This option applies only if the protocol
option is set to addp.
protocol
Default Value: default
Valid Values:
default The feature is not active.
addp Activates the Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol.
Changes Take Effect: When the next connection is established
Specifies the name of the method used to detect connection failures. If you
specify the addp value, you must also specify a value for the addp-timeout,
addp-remote-timeout, and addp-trace options.

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options call-cleanup Section
sync-reconnect-tout
Specifies the time interval after which the backup T-Server attempts to
reconnect to the primary server (for a synchronized link).
call-cleanup Section
The call-cleanup section contains the configuration options that are used to
control detection and cleanup of stuck calls in T-Server. For more information
on stuck call handling, refer to the “Stuck Call Management” chapter in the
Framework 8.0 Management Layer User’s Guide.
This section must be called call-cleanup.
cleanup-idle-tout
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits for a call to be updated from its
last update. After this time elapses, if no new events about the call are
received, T-Server clears this call as a stuck call, either by querying the switch
(if a CTI link provides such capabilities) or by deleting the call information
from memory unconditionally. The default value of 0 disables the stuck calls
cleanup.Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits for a call to be updated
from its last update. After this time elapses, if no new events about the call are
received, T-Server clears this call as a stuck call by terminating the call and
deleting the call information from memory unconditionally. The default value
of 0 disables the stuck calls cleanup.
Note: If the call-cleanup functionality is enabled in T-Server for Avaya

Communication Manager, the UCID (Universal Call ID) feature must
be enabled on the switch as well. This allows the UCID to be
generated and passed to T-Server.
notify-idle-tout
Default Value: 0
Specifies the time interval that T-Server waits for a call to be updated from its
last update. After this time elapses, if no new events about the call are
received, T-Server reports this call as a stuck call. The default value of 0
disables the stuck calls notification.
176 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options call-cleanup Section
periodic-check-tout
Default Value: 10 min
Specifies the time interval for periodic checks for stuck calls. These checks
affect both notification and cleanup functionality, and are made by checking
the T-Server’s own call information with call information available in the
switch. For performance reasons, T-Server does not verify whether the
notify-idle-tout or cleanup-idle-tout option has expired before performing
this check.Specifies the time interval for periodic checks for stuck calls. These
checks affect both notification and cleanup functionality. For performance
reasons, T-Server does not verify whether the notify-idle-tout or
cleanup-idle-tout option has expired before performing this checking.
Note: Setting this option to a value of less than a few seconds can affect
T-Server performance.
Examples
This section presents examples of option settings in the call-cleanup section.
Example 1 cleanup-idle-tout = 0
notify-idle-tout = 0
periodic-check-tout = 10
With these settings, T-Server will not perform any checks for stuck calls.
Example 2 cleanup-idle-tout = 0
notify-idle-tout = 5 min
periodic-check-tout = 10 min
With these settings, T-Server performs checks every 10 minutes and sends
notifications about all calls that have been idle for at least 5 minutes.
Example 3 cleanup-idle-tout = 20 min
notify-idle-tout = 5 min
periodic-check-tout = 10 min
With these settings, T-Server performs checks every 10 minutes, sends
notifications about all calls that have been idle for at least 5 minutes, and
attempts to clean up all calls that have been idle for more than 20 minutes.

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options Translation Rules Section
Translation Rules Section

The section name is specified by the inbound-translator-<n> option. It
contains options that define translation rules for inbound numbers.
You can choose any name for this section, provided that it matches the value of
the section. Every option in this section corresponds to a rule and must
conform to the format described below. You can configure as many rules as
necessary to accommodate your business needs.
rule-<n>
Valid Value: Any valid string in the following format:
in-pattern=<input pattern value>;out-pattern=<output pattern value>
Defines a rule to be applied to an inbound number. The two parts of the option
value describe the input and output patterns in the rule. When configuring the
pattern values, follow the syntax defined in “Using ABNF for Rules” on
page 70. See “Configuring Number Translation” on page 77 for examples of
these rules as well as detailed instructions for creating rules for your
installation. For example, a value for this configuration option might look like
this:
rule-01 = in-pattern=0111#CABBB*ccD;out-pattern=ABD
security Section
The security section contains the configuration options that are used to
configure secure data exchange between T-Servers and other Genesys
components. Refer to the Genesys 8.x Security Deployment Guide for complete
information on the security configuration.
Timeout Value Format

This section of the document describes the values to use for those T-Server
common options that set various timeouts. The current format allows you to
use fractional values and various time units for timeout settings.
For timeout-related options, you can specify any value that represents a time
interval, provided that it is specified in one of the following formats:
[[[hours:]minutes:]seconds][milliseconds]
or
[hours hr][minutes min][seconds sec][milliseconds msec]
178 Framework 8.1

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1
Where a time unit name in italic (such as hours) is to be replaced by an integer

value for this time unit.
Integer values with no measuring units are still supported, for compatibility
with previous releases of T-Server. When you do not specify any measuring
units, the units of the default value apply. For example, if the default value
equals 60 sec, specifying the value of 30 sets the option to 30 seconds.
Example 1
The following settings result in a value of 1 second, 250 milliseconds:
sync-reconnect-tout = 1.25
sync-reconnect-tout = 1 sec 250 msec
Example 2
The following settings result in a value of 1 minute, 30 seconds:
timeout = 1:30
timeout = 1 min 30 sec
Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1

Table 14 lists the configuration options that:
• Are new or changed in the 8.1 release of T-Server
• Have been added or changed since the most recent 8.0 release of this
document
If a configuration option has been replaced with another that enables the same
functionality, the new option name and its location in this chapter are noted.
Table 14: Option Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1
Option Name Option Values Type of Details

Change
TServer Section
background-processing true, false See Details Default value changed to true.

See the option description on
page 154.

Chapter 8: T-Server Common Configuration Options Changes from Release 8.0 to 8.1
180 Framework 8.1

Chapter
9 Configuration Options in
This chapter describes configuration options unique to the Network T-Server
for AT&T, and includes these sections:

Mandatory Options, page 181
 AsnSap Section, page 183

pgf Section, page 186

crp Section, page 186
 Timers Section, page 189

DecSs7 Section, page 189

NMS Section, page 190
 OpenCall Section, page 192

Changes from 8.0 to 8.1, page 193
To establish a link connection, configure the link options that are applicable to
the connection protocol used in your environment (TCP/IP).
Mandatory Options
This section lists the options that must be configured for basic T-Server
operation. All other options in this chapter are configured to enable T-Server to
support various features. See Table 15 for a list of mandatory options.
To establish a link connection, simply configure the link options (TCP/IP or
X.25) that are applicable to the connection protocol used in your environment.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T Mandatory Options
Table 15: Mandatory Options
Option Name Default Value Details
crp Section
def-label No default value Specifies the default label to route

calls that were not processed by
Interaction Router during the
interval specified in the Call
Timeout option in the Timers
section.
See description on page 186.
AsnSap Section
type-table-file CRP.tt Specifies the relative or absolute

path to the ASN.1 type table file.
codec-data-location- false Determines whether the data to be

specified encoded/decoded is taken from
the data buffer in the message, or
from the property map in the
message.
encode-module-name No default value Determines whether the data to be

encoded/decoded is taken from
the data buffer in the message, or
from the property map in the
message.
encode-type-name No default value Specifies encode instructions to

the ASN SAP.
decode-module-name No default value Specifies decode instructions to

the ASN SAP.
decode-type-name No default value Specifies decode instructions to

the ASN SAP.
182 Framework 8.1

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T AsnSap Section
Table 15: Mandatory Options (Continued)
Option Name Default Value Details
data-location No default value Specifies the location in the

message property map to
take/place the decoded/encoded
ASN information.
property-map-location No default value Specifies the location in the

message property map to
take/place the decoded/encoded
ASN information.
pgf Section
ptc-file tserver.ptc Specifies the file name of the

application file for this T-Server.
OpenCall Section
ss7Name No default value Stack related. Specifies the HP

SS7 class name as declared in the
HP SS7 global.conf file.
AsnSap Section
This section must be labeled AsnSap.
type-table-file
Default Value: CRP.tt
Valid Value: Any valid relative or absolute path to the CRP.tt file
Specifies the relative or absolute path to the ASN.1 type table file.

codec-data-location-specified
Determines whether the data to be encoded/decoded is taken from the data
buffer in the message, or from the property map in the message. If set to true,
property-map-location and data-location become required options.
Warning! In order for this T-Server to operate properly, the value must be set
to true.
encode-module-name
Valid Value: CustomerRoutingPoint
Specifies encode instructions to the ASN SAP.
to CustomerRoutingPoint.
encode-type-name
Valid Value: ICPRouteResponse
Specifies encode instructions to the ASN SAP.
to ICPRouteResponse.
decode-module-name
Valid Value: CustomerRoutingPoint
Specifies decode instructions to the ASN SAP.
to CustomerRoutingPoint.
184 Framework 8.1

decode-type-name
Valid Value: ICPRouteRequest
Specifies decode instructions to the ASN SAP.
to ICPRouteRequest.
data-location
Valid Value: TCAP.ComponentList.Parameters
Specifies the location in the message property map to take/place the
decoded/encoded ASN information. When encoding, place the encoded data in
this location in the property map. When decoding, take the data to be decoded
from this location in the property map. This property is not used unless
codec-data-location-specified is set to true, and then it becomes required.
to TCAP.ComponentList.Parameters.
property-map-location
Valid Value: ASN
Specifies the location in the message property map to take/place the
decoded/encoded ASN information. When encoding, take the properties to be
encoded from this location in the property map. When decoding, place the
decoded properties in this location in the property map. This option is not used
unless codec-data-location-specified is set to true, and then it becomes
required.
to ASN.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T pgf Section
pgf Section
This section must be labeled pgf.
ptc-file
Default Value: tserver.ptc
Valid Value: Any valid relative or absolute path to the CRP.smx file
Specifies the file name of the application file for this T-Server.
Warning! This must be set to the path name of the CRP.smx file.
crp Section
This section must be labeled crp.
def-route-type
Default Value: Destination
Valid Values: Destination, Announcement, PostFeature
Specifies the default route type for calls not processed by Interaction Router
during the interval specified in the Call Timeout option in the Timers section.
def-label
Valid Value: Any valid AT&T routing label
Specifies the default label to route calls that were not processed by Interaction
Router during the interval specified in the Call Timeout option in the Timers
section.
use-purge-by-size
Default Value: no
Valid Values: yes, no
Specifies whether an unprocessed call is routed to the default destination when
the number of unprocessed calls exceeds the value specified in the
max-queue-size option.
186 Framework 8.1

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T crp Section
max-queue-size
Default Value: 1000
Valid Value: Any positive integer greater than or equal to 1000
Specifies the number of calls that can be queued. After this limit is reached,
unprocessed calls are routed to the default destination if the use-purge-by-size
option is set to yes.
min-dialed-len-national
Default Value: 10
Valid Value: Any integer from 0–255
Specifies the minimum number of digits for a nationally dialed number. If the
number of digits dialed is less than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
max-dialed-len-national
Default Value: 11
Specifies the maximum number of digits for a nationally dialed number. If the
number of digits dialed is more than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
min-dialed-len-international
Default Value: 10
Specifies the minimum number of digits for an internationally dialed number.
If the number of digits dialed is less than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
max-dialed-len-international
Default Value: 11
Specifies the maximum number of digits for an internationally dialed number.
If the number of digits dialed is more than specified, T-Server rejects the
routing request.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T crp Section
min-ani-len-national
Default Value: 10
Specifies the minimum number of digits for an ANI in the national format. If
the number of digits dialed is less than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
max-ani-len-national
Default Value: 10
Specifies the maximum number of digits for an ANI in the national format. If
the number of digits dialed is more than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
min-ani-len-international
Default Value: 3
Specifies the minimum number of digits for an ANI in the international format.
If the number of digits dialed is less than specified, T-Server rejects the routing
request.
max-ani-len-international
Default Value: 15
Specifies the maximum number of digits for an ANI in the international
format. If the number of digits dialed is more than specified, T-Server rejects
the routing request.
min-ced-len
Default Value: 0
Specifies the minimum number of digits for a CED. If the number of digits
dialed is less than specified, T-Server rejects the routing request.
188 Framework 8.1

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T Timers Section
max-ced-len
Default Value: 30
Specifies the maximum number of digits for a CED. If the number of digits
dialed is more than specified, T-Server rejects the routing request.
Timers Section
This section must be labeled Timers.
Valid Units of Time

The default unit of time for all timers is milliseconds (ms). If you do not supply
a unit of time, then ms is assumed. Valid unit of time are:
ms = milliseconds
s = seconds
min = minutes
h = hours
d = days
Call Timeout
Default Value: 750 ms
Valid Value: Any positive integer and valid unit of time.
Specifies the amount of time that a call can exist before being default routed.
DecSs7 Section
This section must be labeled DecSs7.
tcap-allow-multi-comp
Valid Values: false, true
Specifies whether the SAP will allow more than one component to be placed in
a package.
to false.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T NMS Section
NMS Section
This section must be labeled NMS.
serviceName
Default Value: TCAP
Valid Value: <string>
The name of the Natural Access service under which the application will run.
serviceManager
Default Value: TCAPMGR
Valid Value: <string>
The name of the Natural Access service manager that will be used.
paramFlags
Default Value: shared
Valid Values: shared, local
Specifies whether global default parameters are stored in shared memory or in
the process local memory.
traceFlags
Default Value: enable
Valid Values: enable, disable, on error
Applies only if paramFlags is not local. If not disabled, trace information is
sent to the ctdaemon.
boardNum
Default Value: 1
Valid Value: <integer>
The number of the TCAP board.
appid
Default Value: 32
Valid Value: Any positive integer from 32–63
The application (entity) ID.
190 Framework 8.1

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T NMS Section
sapid
Default Value: 0
The Natural Access service access point ID defined for the application.
ssn
Default Value: 254
The subsystem number for the application.
ansi_param_container
Default Value: sequence
Valid Values: sequence, set
Specifies the container type that parameters will be placed in. This is required
ANSI.
switchover
Default Value: 10
Specifies the time interval (in milliseconds) used to check for TCAP messages
received by the stack.
a package.
to false.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T OpenCall Section
OpenCall Section
This section must be labeled OpenCall.
ssn
Default Value: 0
Changes Take Effect: On connection open
Stack related. Specifies the SS7 subsystem number that T-Server services. You
must specify a value for this option.
ss7Name
Default Value: Mandatory field. No default value.
Valid Value: <string> (no longer than 20 alphanumeric characters)
Stack related. Specifies the HP SS7 class name as declared in the HP SS7
global.conf file (see the HP OpenCall SS7 Platform Management Guide for
details). You must specify a value for this option.
sccpServiceType
Default Value: Regular
Valid Values: White, Ansi, Regular
Stack related. Determines the type of SCCP layer being used. Should be set to
Regular.
appId
Default Value: 1
Application related. Identifies the user application. Load sharing is possible by
setting up several connections with the same appId (see the HP OpenCall SS7
Platform Management Guide for details). You must specify a value for this
option.
instId
Default Value: 1
Valid Value: Any positive integer from 0–255
Specifies the number to differentiate between T-Servers having the same ID as
specified in the appId option (see the HP OpenCall SS7 Platform Management
Guide for details). You must specify a value for this option.
192 Framework 8.1

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T Changes from 8.0 to 8.1
openTimeout
Default Value: 10000
Valid Value: Any positive integer
Specifies (in milliseconds) the timeout after which an open attempt fails.
reconnectTimeout
Default Value: 5000
Valid Value: Any positive integer
Specifies (in milliseconds) the timeout after which an attempt is made to
re-open a failed connection.
a package.
to false.
Changes from 8.0 to 8.1

No configuration options have been changed between the 8.0 and 8.1 releases
of Network T-Server for AT&T.

Chapter 9: Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T Changes from 8.0 to 8.1
194 Framework 8.1

Appendix
Installing and Configuring

NMS SS7, TX3220 and
TX4000
This document contains the following sections:

Installing and Configuring TX3220, page 195
 Sample Configuration Files, page 208

Installing and Configuring TX4000, page 216

Sample TX 4000 Configuration Files, page 221
Note: This appendix provides instructions for the Windows 2000 Advanced
Server SP3 and Solaris 8 (64-bit) platforms. In most cases, the
instructions are the same for both platforms. When an instruction
differs by platform, the instruction begins “On Windows” or “On
Solaris.”
Installing and Configuring TX3220
Procedure:
Installing and configuring TX3220
Purpose: This section provides detailed information for installing and

configuring SS7 and the TX3220 board.

Appendix: Installing and Configuring NMS SS7, TX3220 and TX4000 Installing and Configuring TX3220
Start of procedure
1. Download NMS Software. Contact NMS Communications
(www.nmscommunications.com) to obtain the latest versions of the SS7
and Natural Access software supported by the Network T-Server.
Information on supported versions can be found in the Network T-Server
for AT&T Release Note.
2. Installing NMS Software.
a. Genesys recommends that you install the SS7 and Natural Access
software on the same machine as your Network T-Server.
b. Review the SS7 and Natural Access readme files to verify that you
have downloaded the correct software for your operating system and
that your Network T-Server machine meets the NMS hardware and
memory requirements.
c. To install the software, you must log on with Administrator privileges
on Windows or as Superuser on Solaris. You do not need Administrator
or Superuser privileges to use the software; these privileges are needed
only to install SS7 and Natural Access.
d. Install the SS7 software, and reboot when prompted.
• On Windows, the installation software adds product directories to
the %PATH% variable, so SS7 utilities can be invoked from any
directory.
• On Solaris, you need to set the following environmental variables
for the user account which is used to run Genesys products:
The LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable for this account should include the
directory /opt/nms/lib:/opt/nmstx/lib
The PATH variable should include the directory
/opt/nms/bin:/opt/nmstx/bin
Note: The way you set up these variables depends on the shell you use.
See the readme_ss7.txt file (which downloads with the SS7
installation package) for examples and other installation
information.
e. Install the Natural Access software, and reboot when prompted.
Note: Genesys has tested the Network T-Server for AT&T on Windows
2000 Advanced Server SP3 and on Solaris 8 (64-bit).
3. Install the NMS TX3220 board in a spare PCI slot on the machine where
you just installed SS7 and Natural Access.
196 Framework 8.1

Note: Do not use a shared IRQ PCI slot to install the TX3220. Refer to
your machine’s documentation to see where this slot and any
unused slots are located.
4. When you power up after installing the TX3220:

• On Windows, the operating system should detect a new hardware
device (called PCI Bridge). The operating system should then install a
driver from the previously installed SS7 package automatically. As part
of this installation, the operating system updates the system %PATH%
variable so that the SS7 utilities become available from any working
directory.
• On Solaris, no additional installation steps are required. However, you
can use the dmesg command to check your system startup log to see if
the new board was detected.
Warning! Do not connect any cables to the TX3220 board at this time.
You must download the TX3220 firmware and configure the
board before connecting the cables.
5. Upload NMS Firmware to the TX3220

a. Edit the ss7load file to enable SCCP and TCAP.
b. From a command prompt (in any directory), type ss7load and press
Enter. This command downloads pre-configured firmware into the
default board (Board 1). On Solaris, the output of ss7load should be
similar to the example shown in Figure 11:
$ ./ss7load board(1) statistics cleared
TX32XX FLASH Interface Utility V3.0

Copyright 1997-2001, NMS Communications
CP number 1 booted.
Loading: diag Version 1.0 07/15/02
Loading: inf Version 4.0 07/15/02
Loading: mvip Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: t1e1mgr Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: arp Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: mtp Version 7.1.13 03/06/03
Loading: sccp Version 6.1.2 03/21/03
Loading: tcap Version 4.1 07/15/02
Figure 11: Output from ss7load Command

c. Open a new command window (on Windows) or terminal (on Solaris),

and type txalarm and press Enter. This starts the txalarm utility, which
prints out the stack diagnostic (trace) information.
d. Issue the ss7load command again, and then check the output of the
txalarm utility.This utility reports any errors and the versions of the
firmware that has been loaded. The set of packages and the versions
shown in your txalarm window may differ from the sample output in
Figure 11, but you should not see any errors in the txalarm window.
The first time you run ss7load after updating the firmware, you may
get a message from ss7load that the card flash memory was updated.
Note: You should check the output of txalarm for errors each time you
run ss7load.
6. Verify Firmware and SS7 Installation

a. Verify that SS7 and the TX3220 firmware have been installed correctly
and are running on your system:
— On Windows:
i. Locate the NMS applet in the Services folder. Select
Start->Administrative Tools->Component Services. In the
Component Services window, select the Services (Local) folder.
ii. Double-click NMS in the Services (Local) folder to run the NMS
applet. Select TX3220 when prompted.
iii. After the NMS applet runs, check the statistics it generates to verify
that the TX3220 is running without errors. Figure 12 shows an
example of the statistics.
198 Framework 8.1

Figure 12: TX3220 Statistics—Windows Platform
— On Solaris:
i. At a shell prompt, run the shell command cputil -b 1 -s
ii. Check the output of this command (on the shell prompt screen) to
verify that the TX3220 adapter is running without errors. Figure 13
shows an example of the statistics.

TX3220 board(1) statistics:

SENDING DATA (from host to TX):
Unacked Send Msgs____________[0]
SEND REQUESTs from apps______[1122]
SEND REQUESTs posted to TX___[1122]
SEND REPLYs from TX__________[1122]
OK ACKs to app_______________[1122]
ERROR ACKs (flow controlled)_[0]
ERROR ACKs (bad state)_______[0]
ERROR ACKs (write failed)____[0]
Postponed (TX msg limit)_____[0]
No TX trans index____________[0]
Non-data requests from apps__[3980]
RECEIVING DATA (from TX to host):
SEND REQUESTs from TX________[73778]
SEND REQUESTs (unbound chan)_[51223]
SEND REQUESTs (have chan)____[22555]
SEND REQUESTs (payload)______[33]
Data indicators to app_______[22555]
Data payloads to app_________[33]
SEND REPLYs to TX____________[22555]
SEND REPLYs drop (bad state)_[0]
SEND REPLYs (app closed)_____[0]
SEND REPLYs (No RX wait)_____[0]
ERROR CONDITIONS:
SEND ERROR ACKs to app_______[2]
Out of State errors__________[0]
Out of Memory errors_________[0]
Anomaly errors_______________[0]
Empty free message FIFO______[0]
PCI INTERFACE:
Total Interrupts_____________[75984]
InPostListCount______________[0]
OutPostListStatus____________[0]
OutPostListMask______________[0]
OutPostListCount_____________[0]
Figure 13: TX3220 Statistics—Solaris Platform
b. On Windows or Solaris, from a command prompt, run the command

txalarm. This utility prints out the stack diagnostic (trace) information.
The utility also reports firmware upload status immediately after the
ss7load command is run.
Note: You should check the output of txalarm for errors each time you
run the NMS applet, the cputil command, or the ss7load command.
200 Framework 8.1

7. Upgrade TX3220 Firmware. NMS Communications Technical Support

periodically posts newer versions of the TX3220 firmware to its website to
resolve specific problems. You may need to update the TX3220 firmware.
a. Locate the firmware files on your system (the path depends on your
operating system). These are binary files with extension *.lot.
b. Back up all the existing *.lot files.
c. Check the NMS Communications website
http://www.nmscommunications.com for updated firmware.
Note: At the time of this release, you must install the patches listed in
Figure 14 for the SS7 stack to work on the AT&T network.
$ ./ss7load board(1) statistics cleared
TX32XX FLASH Interface Utility V3.0

CP number 1 booted.
Loading: diag Version 1.0 07/15/02
Loading: inf Version 4.0 07/15/02
Loading: mvip Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: t1e1mgr Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: arp Version 2.0 07/15/02
Loading: mtp Version 7.1.13 03/06/03
Loading: sccp Version 6.1.2 03/21/03
Loading: tcap Version 4.1 07/15/02
Figure 14: TX3220 Firmware Patches
d. Copy the updated firmware files from the website to the same location
on your system as the existing files.
Note: You may need to contact NMS Technical Support to get these
versions of the firmware files (.lots). The firmware is identical
for Windows and Solaris.
e. After you update the firmware files, issue the ss7load command from a
command prompt, and then issue the txalarm command.
f. Review the output of txalarm, to verify the updated version
information and check for error messages.
8. Modify the ss7load Batch File
a. Locate the ss7load file on your system:
• On Windows, the ss7load.bat file is located in the \nms\tx\bin
directory.

• On Solaris, the ss7load shell script is located in the

/opt/nmstx/bin/ directory.
b. Within the Network T-Server installation directory, create a
subdirectory called ss7config. (Although the ss7config subdirectory
name is used throughout the instructions in this appendix, you could
use a different subdirectory name on your system.)
c. Copy the ss7load file into the ss7config subdirectory, and open the file
in a text editor.
d. Edit the ss7load file to enable the SCCP and TCAP subsystems. Do
not load the ISUP and TUP subsystems. Comment out the lines that
refer to ISUPcp%BRD%.cfg and TUPcp%BRD%.cfg. On Windows, the
standalone configuration (:stdalncfg) settings should be similar to the
settings shown in Figure 15.
:stdalncfg
rem
rem Load standalone configuration files - note that each board in a
standalone
rem configuration gets a configuration file unique to that board
rem
@echo [%TIME%] Loading : %TXUTIL%\sccpcfg -b %BRD% -f
%TXCONFIG%\SCCPcp%BRD%.cfg
%TXUTIL%\sccpcfg -b %BRD% -f %TXCONFIG%\SCCPcp%BRD%.cfg
Figure 15: Standalone Configuration (:stdalncfg) Settings
e. The ss7load file refers to several firmware files (.lot) and SS7
configuration files (.cfg) located in the NMS installation directory.
Copy these files to the ss7config subdirectory.
f. Modify the ss7load script variable TXCONFIG to point to the copies of
the SS7 configuration files in the ss7config subdirectory.
g. While it is not required, you might want to configure your system so
the ss7load script starts each time your operating system starts.
• On Windows, you can either create a shortcut to run the ss7load
upload script and add the shortcut to the Run->Program->Startup
folder, or add the ss7load command as the first line of the batch
file that starts the Network T-Server. (See Step 14 on page 208 for
information about creating a batch file to start the Network
T-Server.)
• On Solaris, add ss7load to the beginning of the shell script that
runs the Network T-Server. (See Step 14 on page 208 for
information about creating a shell script to start the Network
T-Server.)
202 Framework 8.1

9. Configure the TX3220, SS7, MTP2, and MTP3 files. The TX 3220 board
and SS7 stack parameters are scattered across several text-based
configuration files. These configuration files are compiled to binary form
and then uploaded to the TX3220 board using the ss7load command.
You need to update the following configuration files:
• MTP2cp1.cfg
• MTP3cp1.cfg
• SCCPcp1.cfg
• TCAPcp1.cfg
a. Locate these configuration files on your system. In a standard
installation, the files are located in the following directories:
• On Windows: \nms\tx\config\standalone\ansi
• On Solaris: /opt/nmstx/etc/standalone/ansi/
b. Copy the configuration files into the ss7config directory, and open the
files in a text editor.
c. Before updating the SS7 configuration file, collect the following
information:
• Point codes assigned to the Genesys Network Routing Solution
(NRS) platform
• Point codes assigned to AT&T signaling transfer points (STPs)
• Link configuration—how the NRS platform is connected to the
STPs
• Routing information—the rules that define how messages should
be sent across the links
d. Open the SS7 configuration file sccpcp1par.cfg in a text editor, and
Save As the file with a name that follows your company’s naming
convention. Then enter the data you collected in the previous step.
e. Before updating an MTP2 or MTP3 configuration file, collect the
following information:
• Whether the board should be configured as DTE or DCE
• Physical interface type (V.35 Serial or T1/E1)
• Baud rate
• SLCs (SS7 service link codes) assigned to the links
f. Open the MTP2 or MTP3 configuration file (mtp2cp1par.cfg or
mtp3cp1par.cfg) in a text editor, and Save As the file with a name that
follows your company’s naming convention. Then enter the data you
collected in the previous step.
Note: See the sample configuration files in on “Sample Configuration

Files” on page 208 for more configuration information.

g. After you make changes to the configuration files, run the ss7load
command to update the configuration. After ss7load runs, check the
output of txalarm for errors. The most common errors are misspelled
options and incompatible settings. For a list of available SS7 options,
refer to the NMS Communications document SS7 Installation and
Configuration Manual.
Note: Make sure the txalarm utility is running before you issue the
ss7load command.
h. If you use the DCE hardware configuration, you will need to open the
V.35 pod connected to the NMS board and manually change the jumper
configuration. V.35 pod configuration is described in the NMS
Communications document TX3220 Installation Manual.
10. Modify the Network T-Server for AT&T Configuration.
a. Open the Genesys Configuration Manager.
b. From the Configuration Manager main menu, select View > Options.
c. In the Environment directory, select Applications, and then
double-click your Network T-Server application to open its Properties
dialog.
d. From the Properties dialog, select the Options tab.
e. On the Options tab, double-click the NMS object.
f. Change (or create) the following options:
• ssn=254 (This is the subsystem number. You must use 254 for this
value.)
• sapid=0 (This value corresponds to the USER_SAP parameter as
defined in both the sccpcp1.cfg and tcapcp1.cfg SS7 configuration
files. The value may be different on your system.)
Note: The ssn and sapid should match the values defined in the NMS
configuration files. If you use the template files provided with
Network T-Server, these values are already configured. See Step 9
on page 203 for information about configuring these files. Also see
the configuration samples in “Sample Configuration Files” on
page 208.
g. Create a Switching Office object for the AT&T switch.

h. Define a switch object for the switch that is connected to the Network
T-Server for AT&T. The properties for this switch should correspond
to the properties you just defined for the AT&T Switching Office
object.
i. Define Service Numbers (DNs) for this switch. The DN values are
assigned by the provider (AT&T).
204 Framework 8.1

Note: See “Chapter 5, “AT&T–Specific Configuration,” on page 115 and the

Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide for information on how to complete
these configuration steps (and other necessary configuration) for the
Network T-Server for AT&T in the Configuration Layer.
11. Start the Network T-Server for AT&T.

a. Use a batch file (Windows) or a script (Solaris) to start the Genesys
Network T-Server for AT&T. Do not run it as a service on Windows.
You may want to add the ss7load command to the beginning of the
batch file or script to ensure that you are using the current
configuration for the SS7 stack. You also may need to specify a
Genesys license file for the Network T-Server.
b. In Configuration Manager, open the Network T-Server’s Properties
dialog box and select the Options tab. Turn on the maximum verbosity
level and choose log output to the console and log output to a
file.
c. Check the output of the txalarm command immediately after you start
the Network T-Server. The txalarm output should report that the
subsystem number (SSN) corresponding to the Network T-Server is in
service. Because the TX3220 cables are still disconnected at this point,
you also should see link alignment attempts (SS7 SIO/SIOS messages)
in the txalarm output about every 10 seconds. If the MTP2 and MTP3
layers are aligned, you should get a txalarm message similar to
Figure 16.
<06/20/2003 14:30:36> sccp 1 18673 DEBUG: SCCP - Local

Broadcast Msg 4
<06/20/2003 14:30:36> sccp 1 18434 SCCP User Sap 0 [SSN 9]
In Service
Figure 16: txalarm Message
12. Connect TX3220 Cables

a. Configure and provision the T1 lines or V.35 cables before you connect
them to the TX3220 board.
b. Connect the T1 lines or V.35 cables to your TX3220 board. A T1 line
is connected directly to the on-board RJ-45 connector. Use a Quad
V.35 pod to connect V.35 cables.
13. This step contains troubleshooting tips that you can use before connecting
the TX3220 cables but after the entire system has been connected and
configured.
a. When the TX3220 cables are disconnected, you should be able to see
link alignment attempts (SS7 SIO/SIOS messages) in the txalarm
output every several seconds, as shown in Figure 17.

<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 18180 MTP3 Link 1 Down

<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 Flushing Buffers
(OutPktCnt=0) (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 Starting Alignment
(Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 Sent SIO (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 ALIGN TIMER 2 EXPIRED
iacSt=8 (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 LinkFailure (Lnk 0):
Alignment Not Possible
<06/20/2003 14:40:38> mtp 1 1 Sent SIOS (Lnk 0)
Figure 17: Link Alignment Attempts in txalarm Output
b. Once you have properly configured the SS7 stack and TX3220
hardware, soon after you connect the cables to the TX3220, the
txalarm output should show that the links are aligned.
c. After the physical links have been connected and configured, with the
Network T-Server running, issue the ss7load command at a command
prompt.
d. Check the txalarm output for the following items. You should see log
messages similar to those shown in Figure 18.
• The MTP3 links are aligned—you should see SS7 SIO, SLTM, and
other messages.
• The Network T-Server SSN is in service.
• Requests from the AT&T network for configured Service Numbers
are processed, and can be seen in the Network T-Server log.
206 Framework 8.1

<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Starting Alignment (Lnk 0)

<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Sent SIO (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Flushing Buffers
(OutPktCnt=0) (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Starting Alignment (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Sent SIO (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIO (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Sent SIN (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIOS (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIO (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:54> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIN (Lnk 1)
<06/20/2003 14:36:55> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIO (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:55> mtp 1 1 Sent SIN (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:55> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIO (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:55> mtp 1 1 Rcvd SIN (Lnk 0)
<06/20/2003 14:36:56> mtp 1 1 Timer 4 Expired (LINK 1
ALIGNED at layer 2)
<06/20/2003 14:36:56> mtp 1 1 Setting link 1 ACTIVE from
SLTA
Figure 18: Link Alignment Confirmations in txalarm Output
e. Correct any problems you find in the log.

By editing the SS7 configuration files, you can turn on additional trace
information for MTP2 and MTP3. Use the SS7 management utilities
described in the NMS Communications document SS7 Installation and
Configuration Manual for troubleshooting.
If the links are not aligned or the SS7 messages are not being
processed, use these troubleshooting checklists to pinpoint the
problem:
• MTP2 Layer
— Is the DTE/DCE type set correctly?
— Are the baud rate and clock sources (Receive, Transmit, and
External) set correctly?
— Are the DTR/DSR and CTS/RTS handshakes working?
• MTP3 Layer
— Is the node type set correctly? (It should be set to SP.)
— Is the SLC set as defined by AT&T?
— Are the point codes set as defined by AT&T?
• SCCP/TCAP

Appendix: Installing and Configuring NMS SS7, TX3220 and TX4000 Sample Configuration Files
— Is the stack type properly configured? (The LINK_TYPE should

be set to ANSI, and the SWITCH_TYPE should be set to ITU92.)
— Are the routing rules set for both UP and DOWN? (See the
sample configurations in “Sample Configuration Files” on
page 208.)
f. After correcting any problems you find in the txalarm output, run the
ss7load command again, and check the txalarm output again.
14. Configure the SS7 Stack and Network T-Server for Production
a. Disable the trace mode in the SS7 configuration files.
b. Turn off debug logging for the Network T-Server in Configuration
Manager.
c. Although it is not required, you might want to configure your system
so the Network T-Server starts each time your operating system starts.
• On Windows, you can create a shortcut to run the Network
T-Server, and move the shortcut to the Start->Programs->Startup
folder so the Network T-Server will be started automatically at
system startup.
Instead of a shortcut for the Network T-Server application, you
might want to create a batch file that starts the Network T-Server at
system startup. If you choose this option, Genesys recommends
that you make the ss7load command the first line in this batch file,
before the Network T-Server startup command. You should move
the batch file to the Start->Programs->Startup folder.
As a third alternative, you can set up a Solution Control Server
entry for the Network Routing Solution.
• On Solaris, create a shell script to run the Network T-Server.
Genesys recommends that you make the ss7load command the first
line in this shell script, before the Network T-Server startup
command.
End of procedure
Sample Configuration Files

This section contains sample configuration files for a configuration with two
V.35 links and with the TX3220 board configured as DTE. You can use these
files as a reference; however, the configuration in these files is generic. You
will need to replace several of the parameter settings with real values.
Parameters you need to modify are enclosed in angle brackets, like this:
<GENESYS_PC>.
208 Framework 8.1

Sample MTP3 File (MTP3cp1.cfg)

You can use this MTP3 sample configuration file (mtp3cp1.cfg) as a template.
Note: Replace the sample values with values that apply to your environment.
# $Id: mtp3cp1par.cfg,v 1.1 2003/05/03 02:49:53 kozin Exp $

#
# Template MTP3 Configuration file for AT&T/Genesys NRS/NMS
# SS7 TX3220 board
#
# Written by Genesys/ATG
#
# Replace the following parameters with real values:
#
# <GENESYS_PC>::= Point Code assigned to NRS platform,
# e.g. 231.10.4
# <STP1_PC>::= Point Code assigned to the first ATT STP, e.g.
254.152.0
# <STP2_PC>::= Point Code assigned to the second ATT STP, e.g.
254.153.0
#
# These files only show the use of some basic configurable
# parameters. Please refer to the MTP3 Developer's Guide
# and the SS7 Installation and Configuration Guide for
# information about all possible parameters.
#
#------------------------------------------------
# Overall MTP3 Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
NODE_TYPE SP # choose STP [routing] or SP
[non-routing]
PC_FORMAT DFLT # Point code format: DFLT (8.8.8) /
INTL (3.8.3) / JNTT (7.4.5)
POINT_CODE <GENESYS_PC>
RESTART_REQUIRED TRUE
VALIDATE_SSF TRUE
MAX_LINKS 4
MAX_USERS 1 # sccp only
MAX_ROUTES 64
MAX_ROUTE_ENTRIES 32
MAX_LINK_SETS 2
MAX_ROUTE_MASKS 2
ROUTE_MASK 0xFFFFFFFF
ROUTE_MASK 0xFFFF0000
MTP3_TRACE_DATA TRUE # for debugging only, set to FALSE in
production
END
#

#------------------------------------------------
# Link Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
# LINK 0 (V.35) configuration
#
LINK 0
PORT S1 # T<n> for T1/E1/MVIP, S<n> for serial
(V.35)
LINK_SET 1
LINK_TYPE ANSI # ANSI / ITU / JNTT
ADJACENT_DPC <STP1_PC>
LINK_SLC 0
LSSU_LEN 2
TIMER_T34 90#remove if in production
MAX_SLTM_RETRY 0
SSF NATIONAL # NATIONAL / INTERNATIONAL
INT_TYPE DTE
BAUD 56000
END
#
# LINK 1 (V.35)
#
LINK 1
PORT S2 # T<n> for T1/E1/MVIP, S<n> for serial
(V.35)
LINK_SET 2
LINK_SLC 0
TIMER_T34 90#remove if in production
MAX_SLTM_RETRY 0
LSSU_LEN 2
INT_TYPE DTE
BAUD 56000
END
#------------------------------------------------
# User Parameters (NSAP definition)
#------------------------------------------------
NSAP 0 # isup must be NSAP 0 if its present
END
#
#
#------------------------------------------------
# Routing Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
#
# Route UP from network to applications on this node
#
210 Framework 8.1

ROUTE 0
DPC <GENESYS_PC> # this node
SPTYPE SP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION UP
END
#
# Route to STP 1
#
ROUTE 1
DPC <STP1_PC>
SPTYPE STP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION DOWN
END
#
# Route to STP 2
#
ROUTE 2
DPC <STP2_PC>
SPTYPE STP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION DOWN
END
#
# Route to AT&T Network
#
ROUTE 3
DPC 254.0.0 # AT&T Network 254.x.x
SPTYPE SP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION DOWN
ADJACENT_ROUTE FALSE
END
#
#
#------------------------------------------------
# Linkset Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
LINK_SET_DESCRIPTOR 1
MAX_ACTIVE_LINKS 1
ROUTE_NUMBER 1,0
ROUTE_NUMBER 2,1
ROUTE_NUMBER 3
END
#
MAX_ACTIVE_LINKS 1
ROUTE_NUMBER 1,1

ROUTE_NUMBER 2,0
ROUTE_NUMBER 3
END
#
Sample SS7 File (SCCPcp1.cfg)

You can use this SS7 sample configuration file (SCCPcp1.cfg) as a template.
#
# $Id: sccpcp1par.cfg,v 1.1 2003/05/03 02:49:53 kozin Exp $
#
# Template of SSCP config file for AT&T/ Genesys NRS / NMS SS7
TX3220
#
#
# Parameters to modify:
#
# <GENESYS_PC>::= Point Code of Genesys NRS platform, e.g. 231.10.4
#
# <STP1_PC>::= Point Code of the first ATT STP, e.g. 254.152.0
# <STP2_PC>::= Point Code of the second ATT STP, e.g. 254.153.0
#
# General Configuration Section

MAX_USERS 4 # Max SCCP user applications
MAX_NSAPS 1 # Number of MTP3 interface
(max 1 per switch type)
MAX_SCLI 20 # Max simultaneous sequenced
connectionless
# data xfers (Class 1 only)
MAX_ADDRS 0 # Max Address translation
entries
MAX_ROUTES 10 # Max far point codes SCCP
knows
DEF_ROUTING TRUE # Set Default Routing(FALSE
= OFF, TRUE = ON)
SAVE_CONNS FALSE # Drop connections on lost
link (FALSE) or don't drop (TRUE).
SCCP_ALARM_LEVEL 3 # Set alarm level reporting
# (0=off, 1=default, 2=debug,
3=detail)
TRACE_DATA TRUE # Set data tracing (FALSE =
OFF, TRUE = ON)
MAX_ADJDPC 2 # Max far point codes
directly adjacent to us
212 Framework 8.1

MAX_MSGDRN 5 # Max msgs to send in a batch

when MTP comes up
# (prevents flooding when
link(s) come up)
MAX_XUDT 1 # Number of control blocks to
allocate for
# reassembling segmented
eXtended UnitDaTa
# (ITU-92 only) ????
MAX_XUDTXREF 2 # Max number of local
references used to
# segment eXtended UnitDaTa
????
MAX_CONN 512 # Max number of simultaneous
connections
CONN_THRESH 3 # Minimum number of SCCP
buffers that must be
# available for new connection
to be accepted
QUEUE_THRESH 8 # Max number of buffers that
can be queued for
# connection waiting for conn
window to open
SOG_THRESH 3 # Minimum number of SCCP
buffers that must be
# available for SOR request
from replicated
# (backup) subsystem to be
accepted
# Note all timer values are in seconds (0 disables timer)

XREFFRZ_TIMER 2 # wait before reusing local
reference
#ASMB_TIMER 0 # wait for all segments of
segmented XUDT (ITU-92 only)
FREEZE_TIMER 2 # wait before reusing
connection local reference
CONN_TIMER 180 # wait for response to
connection request
TXINACT_TIMER 600 # wait with no outgoing
packets on a connection
# before issuing Inactivity
test (IT) message
RXINACT_TIMER 900 # wait with no incoming
packets on a connection
# before releasing connection
(should be > TXINACT_TIMER)
REL_TIMER 10 # wait for response to
release request
#REPREL_TIMER 0 # wait for response to 2nd
release request (ITU only)

#INTERVAL_TIMER 0 # wait before reporting

abnormal release (ITU only)
GUARD_TIMER 2 # wait after MTP3 traffic
restart before
# application traffic
RESET_TIMER 30 # wait for response to Reset
Request
#SCLI_TIMER 0 # max time sequenced
connectionless
# transmission can take (class
1)
SST_TIMER 30 # time between subsystem
status tests
SRT_TIMER 30 # time between subsystem
routing tests
NSAP_TIMER 1 # time between bursts of
messages to MTP3 when
# draining built up queue
(prevents congestion
# when link comes back up)
IGNORE_TIMER 30 # delay after receiving SOG
before actually
# going out of service
COORD_TIMER 30 # wait for grant to go out of
service (SOG)
# after issuing SOR request
END
#
# User SAP configuration for 1st application
#
USER_SAP 0 # Sap number start at 0
SWITCH_TYPE ANSI92 # one of ITU92, ITU88,
ANSI92, ANSI88
CONC_PC <STP1_PC># Concerned point code
ADDR_MASK FFF0000000 # match on only 1st 3 digits
of GT
MAX_HOPS 10 # maximum network hops
END # User application 0
#
# User SAP configuration for 2nd application
#
USER_SAP 1 # Application 1
SWITCH_TYPE ANSI92 # one of ITU92, ITU88,
ANSI92, ANSI88
ADDR_MASK FFF0000000 # match only 1st 3 digits of
GT
214 Framework 8.1


#
# Network (MTP3) Saps - one per switch type
#
NSAP 0 # SCCP must be NSAP 1 if isup
present too
SWITCH_TYPE ANSI # one of ITU, ANSI
DPC <GENESYS_PC> # REQUIRED - this nodes point
code
DPC_LEN 24 # normally would'nt specify
this - let it
# default based on switch type
MSG_LEN 256 # MTU length on this network
TXQ_THRESH 20 # max packets queued to this
MTP3
ADDR_MASK FFF0000000 # match 3 digits for global
title translation
# of incoming packets
END # of ANSI MTP3 NSAP
#
# Routes: one route per node known to the SCCP layer
#
ROUTE <STP1_PC> # destination point code
ADJACENT TRUE # this dest directly adjacent
#TRANSLATOR FALSE # not a translator node
END # of route
ROUTE <STP2_PC> # destination point code

ADJACENT TRUE # this dest directly adjacent
#TRANSLATOR FALSE # not a translator node
END # of route
Sample TCAP File (TCAPcp1.cfg)

You can use this TCAP sample configuration file (TCAPcp1.cfg) as a template.
# $Id: tcapcp1par.cfg,v 1.1 2003/05/03 02:49:53 kozin Exp $

#
# Template of TCAP configuration file for
# AT&T / Genesys NRS / NMS SS7 / TX3220 board
#

#
# Parameters to modify: None
#
# General Configuration Section

TCAP_ALARM_LEVEL 1 # standard alarms
MAX_TCAP_USERS 4 # Max TCAP user applications
MAX_TCAP_DIALOGS 200 # Max TCAP simultaneous
dialogs
MAX_TCAP_INVOKES 200 # Max TCAP simultaneous
invokes
MIN_TID_LEN4# Required by ATT
END
#
# User SAP configuration for 1st application
#
USER_SAP 0 # Sap number start at 0
SWITCH_TYPE ITU92 # one of ITU92, ITU88,
ANSI92, ANSI88
INACTIVITY_TIMER 0
#
# User SAP configuration for 2nd application
#
USER_SAP 1 # Application 1
SWITCH_TYPE ITU92 # one of ITU92, ITU88,
ANSI92, ANSI88
Installing and Configuring TX4000
Procedure:
Installing and configuring TX4000
Purpose: The following procedure outlines the steps required to configure the
SS7 stack, install Natural Access, and configure the TX4000 PCI board. The
procedure for installing the TX4000 board is similar to the TX3220 board.
Differences are documented in the following procedure. Refer to the
appropriate step in the TX3220 procedure where indicated.
216 Framework 8.1

Prerequisites
Download NMS Software (TX4000). Contact NMS Communications
(www.nmscommunications.com) to obtain the latest versions of the SS7 and
Natural Access software supported by the Network T-Server. Information on
supported versions can be found in the Network T-Server for AT&T Release
Note.
Start of procedure
1. Download the latest software from http://www.nmscommunications.com.
2. Install the TX4000 board in a spare PCI slot in your computer.
Note: Do not use a shared IRQ PCI slot to install the TX4000. Refer to
your machine’s documentation to see where this slot and any
unused slots are located.
Warning! Do not connect any cables to the TX4000 board at this time.
You must download the TX4000 firmware and configure the
board before connecting the cables.
3. Install the Natural Access software, accept the default settings. Refer to the
Natural Access Installation Guide for further details.
4. Review the installed software.
• On Windows, select Start->Programs->NMS->Natural Access->Version
Utility. The window appears similar to Figure 19.
• On Solaris, At a shell prompt, run the shell command cputil -b 1 -s.

Figure 19: Natural Access Installed Software
5. Select the hardware type, choose either the AG2000 or AG4000 board.
Note: The TX4000 board may not appear in the list of available
hardware.
6. Specify the country where the software is deployed:

• On Windows, select United States from the drop down list.
• On Solaris, select United States from a menu.
7. Install the SS7 Software, accept the default settings, and reboot when
prompted.
Note: Refer to Step 2 on page 196, and the NMS Communications

document TX4000 Installation Manual for further details. You will
need to specify the specific Operating System type and version for
your particular installation.
8. On Windows or Solaris open a command prompt. Assign a board number

to the TX4000 board by using the command line utility txcpcfg. The
following example shows how to complete this process on a Windows
system:
218 Framework 8.1

Note: Samples are provided for reference only, Bus/slot numbers may be
different for your particular installation.
a. Check the installed hardware, use the txcpcfg command.
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator>txcpcfg
TX Configuration Utility V1.1

Bus Slot CP Number CP Model

--- ---- --------- --------
0 13 UNDEFINED TX 4000
Assign a new board number, by typing the bus, slot, and cp number.
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator>txcpcfg 0 13 1

txcpcfg: configuring bus: 0, slot: 13, cpid: 1
Verify that the new setting has been accepted, use the txcpcfg
command.
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator>txcpcfg

Bus Slot CP Number CP Model

--- ---- --------- --------
0 13 1 TX 4000
9. Upgrade the TX4000 firmware. The latest version of the TX4000 firmware
comes with the NMS SS7 Stack. To upgrade the firmware use the
ss7load.bat batch file for a Windows system, or ss7load.sh for a Solaris
system. The procedure is similar for both the TX3220 and TX4000 boards.
Refer to the Step 7 on page 201 for further information.
Warning! Prior to running the batch file it is recommended that you modify
the ss7load script file. Modify the script so the path to the
configuration files points to a local directory and not the
installation directory itself.

10. Modify the ss7load Batch File for TX4000.

The files which must be modified and placed in the ss7load directory are
described in Table 16.
Table 16: SS7load Files Requiring Modification
File Name Description
TXcfg.txt Defines low-level link configuration (T1 settings)
MTP3cp1.cfg Defines MTP2 and MTP3 settings
SCCPcp1.cfga Defines SCCP settings
TCAPcp1.cfga Defines TCAP settings
a. This file is identical for both the TX3220 and TX4000 boards.
Refer to Step 9 on page 203, and the NMS Communications TX4000
Installation Manual for detailed instructions on how to complete this task.
11. Configure TX4000 TXCFG and MTP3 files. Complete the tasks outlined
in Step 9 on page 203 to modify the SCCPcp1.cfg, and TCAPcp1.cfg files.
12. Before updating the MTP3 configuration file, collect the following
information:
• Whether the board should be configured as DTE or DCE
• Physical interface type
• Baud rate
• SLCs (SS7 service link codes) assigned to the links
13. Open the MTP3 configuration file (mtp3cp1.cfg) in a text editor, and Save
As the file with a name that follows your company’s naming convention.
Then enter the data you collected in the previous step.
14. Open the TXCFG configuration file (txcfg1.txt) in a text editor, Save As
the file with a name that follows your company’s naming convention.
Note: Sample TX4000 MTP3 and TXCFG configuration files are located on
page 221.
15. After you make changes to the configuration files, run the ss7load
command to update the configuration. After ss7load runs, check the
output of txalarm for errors. The most common errors are misspelled
options and incompatible settings. For a list of available SS7 options, refer
to the NMS Communications document SS7 Installation and
Configuration Manual.
220 Framework 8.1

Appendix: Installing and Configuring NMS SS7, TX3220 and TX4000 Sample TX 4000 Configuration Files
16. Complete the procedure to modify the configuration for Network T-Server
for AT&T, see Step 10 on page 204.
17. Complete the procedure to start the Network T-Server for AT&T described
in Step 11 on page 205.
18. Connect the TX4000 cables. Configure and provision the T1 lines or V.35
cables before you connect them to the TX4000 board.
19. Connect the V.35 cables to your TX4000 board. A T1 line is connected
directly to the on-board RJ-45 connector. Use a Quad V.35 pod to connect
V.35 cables.
20. Troubleshooting the TX4000 board. The troubleshooting procedures are
the same for the TX3220, and TX4000 boards. The only difference is that
the initialization messages for the TX4000 board displayed in the txalarm
console are related to the T1 interface for the TX4000, and not the V.35
interface. Refer to Step 13 on page 205 for more details on troubleshooting
procedures.
21. Complete the TX4000 installation and start the Network T-Server for
AT&T by following the procedure outlined in Step 14 on page 208.
End of procedure
Sample TX 4000 Configuration Files

This section contains sample configuration files for the T1 configuration of the
TX4000 board. You can use these files as a reference; however, the
configuration in these files is generic. You will need to replace several of the
parameter settings with real values.
Parameters you need to modify are enclosed in angle brackets, like this:
<portnum>.
Note: The TCAPcp1.cfg, and SCCPcp1.cfg files are the same for the
TX-3220 and TX-4000 boards. Refer to the section labelled “Sample
Configuration Files” on page 208 for examples of these files.
Sample TXCFG File (TXcfg1.txt)

# file : txcfg1.txt - an example of the T1 config for TX4000
# CONFIGURE CLOCK
# CLOCK: clock derived from network 1 drives H.100|H.110 A clocks

clock net=1 a
# CONFIGURE TRUNKS

# Trunk Framing Encoding Buildout Loop Master

t1cfg 1 esf b8zs 0 false
# CONFIGURE PORTS
# syntax : port <portnum> <bus> <outstream> <slot> <speed>
# PortNum L|H|E|T|J Trunk Channel Speed

port 1 t1 1 0 56
# Command Descriptions:
#
#
# Clocking configuration commands:
#
# clock | Set the H.100/H.110 clock registers
[ConfigBoardClock]
# netref | Set the H.100/H.110 NETREF signal
[ConfigNetrefClock]
#
# T1/E1 trunk configuration commands:
# e1cfg | Configure trunk as E1 mode

[ConfigLocalStream]
# t1cfg | Configure trunk as T1 mode
[ConfigLocalStream]
# j1cfg | Configure trunk as J1 mode
[ConfigLocalStream]
# e1opt | Set E1 configuration option
# t1opt | Set T1 configuration option
# j1opt | Set J1 configuration option
#
# Connection commands:
# connect | Make half-duplex connection

[MakeConnection]
# port | Make full-duplex connection
[ConfigLocalTimeslot]
#
# Clocking Control:
#
# CLOCK Command syntax:
# clock <source>[=<network>] <outsigs> [<netref speed>

[<FALLBACK>]]
# where
# <source> = A | B | NR1 | NR2 | NET=<network> | OSC
# <network> = 1..n (where n is maximum network
available)
# <outsigs> = A | B | - (None)
# <netref speed> = 8K | 15M | 20M | - (None)
#
222 Framework 8.1

# <FALLBACK> = <fallback source>[=<fallback network>]

# where
# <fallback source> = A | B | NR1 | NR2 | NET=<fallback
network> | OSC
# <fallback network> = 1..n (where n is maximum network
available)
#
# examples:
# clock a - source from H.100 A clocks; no output
clocks
# clock a b source from H.100 A clocks; drive H.100
B clocks
# clock nr1 - 8k source from NETREF_1 signal (at 8 KHz);
no outputs
# clock net=1 a source from network 1 clock; drive H.100
A clocks
# clock osc b source from internal oscillator; drive
H.100 B clks
# clock a - - b source from H.100 A; fallback to H.100 B
clocks
#
# NETREF Command syntax:
# netref <network> <outsigs> [<netref speed>]
# where
# <network> = 1..n (where n is maximum network available)
# <outsigs> = NR1 | NR2 | NR12 | - (None)
# <netref speed> = 8K | 15M | 20M [DEFAULT 8KHz]
#
# T1/E1 Trunk Configuration:
# T1CFG|J1CFG Command syntax:
# t1cfg <trunk_num> <framing> <encoding> <build_out> <master>

# where
# <trunk_num> = number of trunk to configure (1..n)
# <framing> = D4 | F4 | ESF | F72
# <encoding> = NOZCS | B7ZS | B8ZS
# <build_out> = 0(0 dB) | 1(-7.5 dB) | 2(-15 dB) | 3(-22.5 dB)
# <master> = TRUE | FALSE
#
# T1CFG|J1CFG Parameter Choices:
# Framing:
# D4 = D4 (193S) Framing - 12-frame multiframe format (F12,
D3/4)
# F4 = 4-frame multiframe format (F4)
# ESF = Extended Superframe Format - 24-frame multiframe format
(ESF)
# F72 = 72-frame multiframe format (F72, remote switch mode)
#
# Encoding:
# NOZCS = AMI encoding with NO Zero Code Suppression
# B7ZS = Bit 7 stuffing with Zero code Suppression

# B8ZS = Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

#
# Buildout:
# 0 = 0 dB
# 1 = - 7.5 dB
# 2 = -15 dB
# 3 = -22.5 dB
#
# Loop Master:
# TRUE = Local side of connection acts as timing source for
this circuit
# FALSE = Remote side of connection expected to act as timing
source
#
# T1OPT|J1OPT Command Syntax and Options:
# t1opt|j1opt [!]<flag_name> | <value_name>=<value>

# where:
# ! = do NOT set flag (i.e. clear flag)
# <flag_name> = name of flag to set (or clear if '!'
specified)
# <value_name> = name of value to change
# <value> = new value for named parameter
#
# T1|J1 OPTION FLAGS:
# Name Default Description
# EXZE extended code violation or excessive zero

detection
# SRAF F12:FS-bit of frame 12; ESF:bit2=0
# CRC SET CRC6 check/generation enabled [ESF format only]
# AIS3 AIS detection only in asynchronous state
# SSC2 LFA declared if more than 320 CRC6 errors per
second
# RRAM allow detect of remote(yellow) alarm during bit
error rates
# LOS1 additional condition for LOS alarm cleared:
GR-499-CORE
# SJR [J1:SET] alarm handling done according to ITU-T JG.
704+706
# AXRA SET remote alarm bit set automatically if receiver
async state
# CRCI automatic CRC[4] bit inversion
# XCRCI transmit CRC[4|6] bit inversion
# DCOXC center function of transmit circuitry is enabled
# DAIS automatic AIS insertion disabled
# DAXLT disable auto high impedence transmit pins on
short detect
# DXJA disable internal transmit jitter attenuation
# DCF disable center function of receive circuitry
224 Framework 8.1

# EQON -36 dB receiver; long haul mode (CLR = -10 dB;

short haul)
# RLM receiver mode for receive line monitoring
# CLOS received data is cleared as soon as LOS detected
# SCF corner frequency of DCO-R reduced by factor of 10
to 0.6 Hz
# MCSP multiple candidates synchronization procedure
# SSP select synchronization/resynchronization
procedure
#
# T1|J1 OPTION VALUES:
# Name Default Range Description
# XP0 0xFF[^] 0x00-1F transmit pulse shape mask (for 1st

level)
# XP1 0xFF[^] 0x00-1F transmit pulse shape mask (for 2nd
level)
# XP2 0xFF[^] 0x00-1F transmit pulse shape mask (for 3rd
level)
# XP3 0xFF[^] 0x00-1F transmit pulse shape mask (for 4th
level)
# RIL 0x00 0x00-07 receive input threshold
# SLT 0x02 0x00-03 voltage thresh when receive slicer
generates mark
# PCD 0x00 0x00-FF LOS alarm if no trans in 16x(pcd+1)
consec pulses
# PCR 0x00 0x00-FF LOS alarm clr'ed if pcr+1 pulses in
detect interval
# XY 0x00 0x00-1F spare bits for national use
# SSC 0x00 0x00-03 select sync conditions
#
# [^] = special indicator: transmit pulse shape determined by
line buildout
#
# Boot-Time Connection Definitions:
#
# PORT Command:
# The port command defines a pair of half-duplex connections
(resulting
# in a single full-duplex connection) between the
communications processor
# on the TX board and a remote channel. Port connections can be
made
# over an H100 stream [connecting to another board in the same
chassis]
# or over a local stream [connecting to a remote chassis via
E1/T1/J1].
# The port command includes the specification of the outbound
stream.
# For local streams the inbound stream number is the same as
the outbound.

# For H.100/H.110 the inbound stream number is determined as

follows:
# if <outstream> even; then <instream> = <outstream> + 1
# if <outstream> odd; then <instream> = <outstream> - 1
# port <portnum> <bus> <outstream> <slot> [<speed>]

# where
# <portnum> = communications port number to connect with
# <bus> = H100 (H.100/H.110) | LOCAL (local bus) |
# E1 (local bus to trunk in E1 mode) |
# T1 (local bus to trunk in T1 mode) |
# J1 (local bus to trunk in J1 mode)
# <outstream> = outbound stream #: 0-31(Hbus), 0-n(Local)
# [if <bus>=E1|T1|J1 then <outstream>=1-based
trunk number]
# <slot> = inbound and outbound timeslot: 0-127(Hbus),
0-31(Local)
# [if <bus>=E1|T1|J1 then <slot>=1-31(E1),
0-23(T1/J1)]
# <speed> = 56 | 48 (specify to change from default 64 Kb
speed)
#
# CONNECT Command:
# The connect command defines a single half-duplex connection,
connecting
# a TDM input to a TDM output. Knowledge of the TX board's
local stream
# mapping scheme is required to properly use the connect
command
# (see 'Local Stream Usage' table below).
#
# CONNECT Command syntax:
# connect <inbus> <instream> <inslot> <outbus> <outstream>
<outslot>
# where
# <inbus> = H (H.100/H.110) | L (local bus)
# <instream> = inbound stream # : 0-31(Hbus), 0..n(Local)
# <inslot> = inbound timeslot : 0-127(Hbus), 0-31(Local)
# <outbus> = H (H.100/H.110) | L (local bus)
# <outstream> = outbound stream #: 0-31(Hbus), 0..n(Local)
# <outslot> = outbound timeslot: 0-127(Hbus), 0-31(Local)
#
# TX 4000[C] Local Stream Usage:
# ------------------------------
# The TX 4000 provides the following local streams:
#
# 0 and 1 - Trunk 1
# 4 and 5 - Trunk 2
# 8 and 9 - Trunk 3
# 12 and 13 - Trunk 4
#
226 Framework 8.1

# 16 and 17 - Trunk 5 [CompactPCI only]

#
# 72 and 73 - primary connection to communications processor
(MPC8260)
# 74 and 75 - secondary connection to communications processor
(MPC8260)
#
# 80 - Trunk 1 as single stream (rather than as stream pair)
#
# 84 - Trunk 5 as single stream [CompactPCI only]
###############################################################
Sample MTP3 File (mtp3cp1.cfg)

# file: mtp3cp1.cfg - example of the MTP config for TX4000 board
# Overall MTP3 Parameters
NODE_TYPE SP # choose STP [routing] or SP
[non-routing]
PC_FORMAT DFLT # Point code format: DFLT (8.8.8) /
INTL (3.8.3) / JNTT (7.4.5)
POINT_CODE 231.10.4
RESTART_REQUIRED TRUE
VALIDATE_SSF TRUE
MAX_LINKS 4
MAX_USERS 1 # sccp only
MAX_ROUTES 64
MAX_ROUTE_ENTRIES 32
MAX_LINK_SETS 2
MAX_ROUTE_MASKS 2
ROUTE_MASK 0xFFFFFFFF
ROUTE_MASK 0xFFFF0000
MTP3_TRACE_DATA TRUE
END
#
# LINK CONFIGURATION (for T1 ports)
#
LINK 0
PORT T1 # T<n> for T1/E1/MVIP, S<n> for serial
(V.35)
LINK_SET 1


ADJACENT_DPC 254.152.0 # AT&T STP-1 DPC
LINK_SLC 0
LSSU_LEN 2
# the following settings are to pass AT&T certification
TIMER_T34 90 # remove this for production deployment
MAX_SLTM_RETRY 0
LINK_TRACE_DATA TRUE
END
#
# LINK CONFIGURATION (for T1 ports)
#
LINK 1
PORT T1 # T<n> for T1/E1/MVIP, S<n> for serial
(V.35)
LINK_SET 2
ADJACENT_DPC 254.153.0 # AT&T STP-1 DPC
LINK_SLC 0
LSSU_LEN 2
LINK_TRACE_DATA TRUE
END
#------------------------------------------------
# User Parameters (NSAP definition)
#------------------------------------------------
NSAP 0 # isup must be NSAP 0 if its present
END
#------------------------------------------------
# Routing Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
# Route UP from network to applications on this node
ROUTE 0
DPC 231.10.4 # this node
SPTYPE SP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION UP # default is DOWN
END
#
# Route to STP 1
ROUTE 1
DPC 254.153.0 # STP 1 point code
SPTYPE STP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
DIRECTION DOWN # default is DOWN
END
#
# Route to STP 2
ROUTE 2
228 Framework 8.1

DPC 254.154.0 # STP 2 point code

SPTYPE STP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
END
#
# Route to AT&T Network
ROUTE 3
DPC 254.0.0 # AT&T Network 254.x.x
SPTYPE SP
LINK_TYPE ANSI
ADJACENT_ROUTE FALSE
END
#------------------------------------------------
# Linkset Parameters
#------------------------------------------------
ADJACENT_DPC 254.153.0 # STP-1
MAX_ACTIVE_LINKS 1
ROUTE_NUMBER 1,0
ROUTE_NUMBER 2,1
ROUTE_NUMBER 3
END
#
ADJACENT_DPC 254.154.0 # STP-2
MAX_ACTIVE_LINKS 1
ROUTE_NUMBER 1,1
ROUTE_NUMBER 2,0
ROUTE_NUMBER 3
END

230 Framework 8.1

Supplements
Related Documentation
Resources
The following resources provide additional information that is relevant to this
software. Consult these additional resources as necessary.

• The Release Notes and Product Advisories for this product, which are
available on the Genesys Technical Support website at
http://genesyslab.com/support.
Management Framework
Consult these additional resources as necessary:
• The Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide, which will help you configure,
install, start, and stop Framework components.
• The Framework 8.1 Configuration Manager Help, which describes how to
use Configuration Manager in either an enterprise or multi-tenant
environment.
• The Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Help, which describes how to
use Genesys Administrator in either an enterprise or multi-tenant
environment.
• The Framework 8.0 Configuration Options Reference Manual, which will
provide you with descriptions of configuration options for other
Framework components.
Platform SDK
• The Genesys Events and Models Reference Manual, which contains an
extensive collection of events and call models describing core interaction
processing in Genesys environments.

Related Documentation Resources
• The Voice Platform SDK 8.x .NET (or Java) API Reference, which contains
technical details of T-Library functions.
Genesys
• Genesys Technical Publications Glossary, which ships on the Genesys
Documentation Library DVD and which provides a comprehensive list of
the Genesys and computer-telephony integration (CTI) terminology and
acronyms used in this document.
• Genesys Migration Guide, which ships on the Genesys Documentation
Library DVD, and which provides documented migration strategies for
Genesys product releases. Contact Genesys Technical Support for more
information.
Information about supported hardware and third-party software is available on
the Genesys Technical Support website in the following documents:
• Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference Manual
• Genesys Supported Media Interfaces Reference Manual
Consult these additional resources as necessary:
• Genesys Hardware Sizing Guide, which provides information about
Genesys hardware sizing guidelines for the Genesys 7.x and 8.x releases.
• Genesys Interoperability Guide, which provides information on the
compatibility of Genesys products with various Configuration Layer
Environments; Interoperability of Reporting Templates and Solutions; and
Gplus Adapters Interoperability.
• Genesys Licensing Guide, which introduces you to the concepts,
terminology, and procedures relevant to the Genesys licensing system.
• Genesys Database Sizing Estimator 8.0 Worksheets, which provides a
range of expected database sizes for various Genesys products.
For additional system-wide planning tools and information, see the
release-specific listings of System Level Documents on the Genesys Technical
Support website, accessible from the system level documents by release tab
in the Knowledge Base Browse Documents Section.
Genesys product documentation is available on the:
• Genesys Technical Support website at http://genesyslab.com/support.
• Genesys Documentation Library DVD, which you can order by e-mail
from Genesys Order Management at orderman@genesyslab.com.
232 Framework 8.1

Document Conventions
This document uses certain stylistic and typographical
conventions—introduced here—that serve as shorthands for particular kinds of
information.
Document Version Number

A version number appears at the bottom of the inside front cover of this
document. Version numbers change as new information is added to this
document. Here is a sample version number:
80fr_ref_06-2008_v8.0.001.00
You will need this number when you are talking with Genesys Technical
Support about this product.
Screen Captures Used in This Document

Screen captures from the product graphical user interface (GUI), as used in this
document, may sometimes contain minor spelling, capitalization, or
grammatical errors. The text accompanying and explaining the screen captures
corrects such errors except when such a correction would prevent you from
installing, configuring, or successfully using the product. For example, if the
name of an option contains a usage error, the name would be presented exactly
as it appears in the product GUI; the error would not be corrected in any
accompanying text.
Type Styles
Table 17 describes and illustrates the type conventions that are used in this
document.

Table 17: Type Styles
Type Style Used For Examples
Italic • Document titles Please consult the Genesys Migration

• Emphasis Guide for more information.
• Definitions of (or first references to) Do not use this value for this option.
unfamiliar terms A customary and usual practice is one
• Mathematical variables that is widely accepted and used within a
particular industry or profession.
Also used to indicate placeholder text within
code samples or commands, in the special case The formula, x +1 = 7
where angle brackets are a required part of the where x stands for . . .
syntax (see the note about angle brackets on
page 234).
Monospace All programming identifiers and GUI Select the Show variables on screen
font elements. This convention includes: check box.
(Looks like • The names of directories, files, folders, In the Operand text box, enter your
teletype or configuration objects, paths, scripts, dialog formula.
typewriter boxes, options, fields, text and list boxes, Click OK to exit the Properties dialog
text) operational modes, all buttons (including
box.
radio buttons), check boxes, commands,
tabs, CTI events, and error messages. T-Server distributes the error messages in
EventError events.
• The values of options.
If you select true for the
• Logical arguments and command syntax.
inbound-bsns-calls option, all
• Code samples. established inbound calls on a local agent
Also used for any text that users must are considered business calls.
manually enter during a configuration or Enter exit on the command line.
installation procedure, or on a command line.
Square A particular parameter or value that is optional smcp_server -host [/flags]

brackets ([ ]) within a logical argument, a command, or
some programming syntax. That is, the
presence of the parameter or value is not
required to resolve the argument, command, or
block of code. The user decides whether to
include this optional information.
Angle A placeholder for a value that the user must smcp_server -host <confighost>
brackets specify. This might be a DN or a port number
(< >) specific to your enterprise.
Note: In some cases, angle brackets are
required characters in code syntax (for
example, in XML schemas). In these cases,
italic text is used for placeholder values.
234 Framework 8.1

Index
Symbols B
[] (square brackets). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 background-processing
< > (angle brackets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
<key name> background-timeout
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
backup-sync section
configuration options . . . . . . . . . 174–176
A brackets
angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Access Code square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 buffering
defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 88
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
addp-remote-timeout
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
addp-timeout C
addp-trace call timeout
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol . . 21 call-cleanup section
Agent Login objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 configuration options . . . . . . . . . 176–177
agent reservation cast-type
defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 52, 166
agent-reservation section CDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
configuration options . . . . . . . . .162–163 changes from 8.0 to 8.1
alarm common configuration options . . . . . . 152
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 193
all T-Server common configuration options . 179
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 check-point
angle brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ANI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 check-tenant-profile
ani-distribution configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 cleanup-idle-tout
app configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 101 Code property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
appld codec-data-location-specified
Application objects cof-ci-defer-create
multi-site operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
AsnSap section cof-ci-defer-delete
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 183 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
ATT-specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . 115

Index
cof-ci-req-tout memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 68, 171 memory-storage-size . . . . . . . . . . . 137
cof-ci-wait-all message_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 messagefile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
cof-feature print-attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
cof-rci-tout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
collect-lower-priority-requests standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 time_convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
command line parameters . . . . . . . . . . 101 time_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 x-conn-debug-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
lmspath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 x-conn-debug-api . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
nco X/Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 x-conn-debug-dns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 x-conn-debug-open . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 x-conn-debug-security . . . . . . . . . . 145
commenting on this document . . . . . . . . 11 x-conn-debug-select . . . . . . . . . . . 144
common configuration options . . . . . 132–152 x-conn-debug-timers . . . . . . . . . . . 144
changes from 8.0 to 8.1 . . . . . . . . . . 152 x-conn-debug-write . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
common section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 common options
disable-rbac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 common log options . . . . . . . . . 132–148
enable-async-dns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 common section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
hangup-restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 mandatory options . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
heartbeat-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 sml section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149–151
heartbeat-period-thread-class-<n> . . . . 150 common section
log section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132–146 common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
log-extended section . . . . . . . . .146–148 compatible-output-priority
log-filter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
log-filter-data section . . . . . . . . . . . 149 compound-dn-representation
mandatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
rebind-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Configuration Manager
security section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 configuring T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
sml section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149–151 configuration options
suspending-wait-timeout . . . . . . . . . 150 addp-remote-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . 175
common log options . . . . . . . . . . 132–148 addp-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
<key name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 addp-trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 agent-reservation section . . . . . . . 162–163
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 ani-distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 appld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
check-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 AsnSap section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
compatible-output-priority . . . . . . . . . 137 background-processing . . . . . . . . . . 154
debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 background-timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . 155
default-filter-type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 backup-sync section . . . . . . . . . 174–176
expire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 call timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 call-cleanup section . . . . . . . . . . 176–177
keep-startup-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 cast-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
level-reassign-<eventID> . . . . . . . . . 146 changes from 8.0 to 8.1 . . . . . . . . . . 179
level-reassign-disable . . . . . . . . . . . 148 check-tenant-profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
log section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132–146 cleanup-idle-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
log-extended section . . . . . . . . .146–148 codec-data-location-specified . . . . . . . 184
log-filter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 cof-ci-defer-create . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
log-filter-data section . . . . . . . . . . . 149 cof-ci-defer-delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
mandatory options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 cof-ci-req-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
236 Framework 8.1

Index
cof-ci-wait-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 pgf section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

cof-feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 propagated-call-type . . . . . . . . . 82, 158
cof-rci-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 property-map-location. . . . . . . . . . . 185
collect-lower-priority-requests . . . . . . . 162 protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
common log options . . . . . . . . . .132–148 ptc-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
common options . . . . . . . . . . . .132–152 reconnectTimeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
compound-dn-representation . . . . . . . 173 reconnect-tout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
consult-user-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 register-attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
crp section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 register-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
customer-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 reject-subsequent-request . . . . . . . . 163
data-location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 report-connid-changes . . . . . . . . . . 165
decode-module-name . . . . . . . . . . . 184 request-collection-time . . . . . . . . . . 163
decode-type-name . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 request-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DecSs7 section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 reservation-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
default-dn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 resource-allocation-mode . . . . . . . . . 168
default-network-call-id-matching . . . . . 172 resource-load-maximum . . . . . . . . . 168
def-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 route-dn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
def-route-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 rule-<n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
direct-digits-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 sccpServiceType . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
dn-for-unexpected-calls . . . . . . . . . . 167 security section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
dn-scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 156 server-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
encode-module-name . . . . . . . . . . . 184 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
encode-type-name . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
epp-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 173 ss7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
event-propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ssn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
extrouter section. . . . . . . . . . . .163–174 sync-reconnect-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
handle-vsp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 tcap-allow-multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
inbound-translator-<n> . . . . . . . . . . 174 tcap-allow-multi-comp. . . . . . . . . . . 189
instld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 tcs-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
license section. . . . . . . . . . . . .159–162 tcs-use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
local-node-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
log-trace-flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 timeout value format . . . . . . . . . 178–179
management-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Timers section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
mandatory options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Translation Rules section . . . . . . . . . 178
match-call-once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 TServer section . . . . . . . . . . . . 154–159
max-ani-len-international . . . . . . . . . 188 type-table-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
max-ani-len-national. . . . . . . . . . . . 188 use-data-from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
max-ced-len . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 use-implicit-access-numbers . . . . . . . 169
max-dialed-len-international . . . . . . . . 187 use-purge-by-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
max-dialed-len-national . . . . . . . . . . 187 user-data-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
max-queue-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 configuring
merged-user-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 multi-site operation . . . . . . . . . . 87–100
min-ani-len-international. . . . . . . . . . 188 steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
min-ani-len-national . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
min-ced-len . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
min-dialed-len-international . . . . . . . . 187 TX3220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
min-dialed-len-national . . . . . . . . . . 187 TX4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Network T-Server for AT&T . . . . . . . . 181 consult-user-data
network-request-timeout. . . . . . . . . . 167 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NMS section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 conventions
notify-idle-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 in document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
num-of-licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 type styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
num-sdn-licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 crp section
OpenCall section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 186
openTimeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 customer-id
periodic-check-tout . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Index
D errors, commenting on . . . . . . . . . . . 11
version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
data-location
debug E
decode-module-name enable-async-dns
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 common configuration option . . . . . . . 151
decode-type-name encode-module-name
DecSs7 section encode-type-name
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 189 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Default Access Code epp-tout
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 83, 173
defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
default-dn SetFeatureInvocation error messages . . 128
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 voice processing failure messages . . . . 128
default-filter-type Event Propagation
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
default-network-call-id-matching EventAttachedDataChanged . . . . . . . . . 80
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 event-propagation
def-label configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 expire
def-route-type common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 extrouter section
destination location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 configuration options . . . . . . . . . 163–174
destination T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 configuring for multi-site operation . . . . . 88
direct-ani configuring party events propagation . . . . 84
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . 53, 61 configuring the Number Translation feature 77
direct-callid
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
direct-digits
F
transaction type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 figures
direct-digits-key Multiple-to-Point mode . . . . . . . . . . . 60
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Point-to-Point mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
direct-network-callid steps in ISCC/Call Overflow . . . . . . . . 67
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61 font styles
direct-notoken italic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . 55, 61 monospace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
direct-uui
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . 55, 61
disable-rbac H
common configuration option . . . . . . . 149
DN objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 HA Proxy
dn-for-unexpected-calls starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 handle-vsp
dnis-pool configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
in load-balancing mode . . . . . . . . . . . 57 hangup-restart
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . 48, 56, 61 common configuration option . . . . . . . 150
DNs heartbeat-period
configuring for multi-sites . . . . . . . . . . 94 common configuration option . . . . . . . 149
dn-scope heartbeat-period-thread-class-<n>
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 82, 156 common configuration option . . . . . . . 150
document host
change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 101
conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
238 Framework 8.1

Index
hot standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 lmspath

defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 102
local-node-id
I location parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
log configuration options . . . . . . . . 132–138
inbound-translator-<n> log section
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 common log options . . . . . . . . . 132–146
insld
log-extended section
common log options . . . . . . . . . 146–148
installation
log-filter section
TX3220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
common log options . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Inter Server Call Control . . . . . . . . . .46–65
log-filter-data section
Inter Server Call Control/Call Overflow. . .65–69 common log options . . . . . . . . . . . 149
interaction
log-trace-flags
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ISCC
destination T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
origination T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 M
ISCC transaction types. . . . . . . . . . .47, 52
direct-ani. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 61 Management Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
direct-callid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61 management-port
direct-digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
direct-network-callid . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61 mandatory options
direct-notoken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 61 configuration options . . . . . . . . . 154, 181
direct-uui. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 61 match-call-once
dnis-pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 61 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
in load-balancing mode . . . . . . . . 57 max-ani-len-international
pullback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 61 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
reroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 61 max-ani-len-national
route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 61 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
route-uui . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 max-ced-len
supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
ISCC/COF max-dialed-len-international
supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
iscc-xaction-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 max-dialed-len-national
italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
max-queue-size
K memory
keep-startup-file memory-storage-size
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Known Limitations merged-user-data
Network T-Server for AT&T . . . . . . . . 128 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
message_format
L common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
messagefile
l common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 102 min-ani-len-international
level-reassign-<eventID> configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 min-ani-len-national
level-reassign-disable configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 min-ced-len
license section configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
configuration options . . . . . . . . .159–162 min-dialed-len-international

Index
min-dialed-len-national P
monospace font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 periodic-check-tout
Multiple-to-One mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Multiple-to-Point mode . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60 pgf section
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Point-to-Point mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
N port
command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 101
NAT/C feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 print-attributes
nco X/Y common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
command line parameter . . . . . . . . . 102 propagated-call-type
network attended transfer/conference . . . . 77 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 82, 158
network objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 property-map-location
Network T-Server for AT&T configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
changes from 8.0 to 8.1 protocol
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . 193 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ptc-file
Known Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
mandatory options pullback
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . 181 ISCC transaction type. . . . . . . . . . 57, 61
Service Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Supported Functionality . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switching Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 R
network-request-timeout
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 rebind-delay
NMS section common configuration option . . . . . . . 151
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 190 reconnectTimeout
notify-idle-tout configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 reconnect-tout
Number Translation feature . . . . . . . .69–77 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
number translation rules . . . . . . . . . . . 70 redundancy
num-of-licenses hot standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 warm standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
num-sdn-licenses redundancy types
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 hot standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
register-attempts
O register-tout
objects reject-subsequent-request
Agent Logins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 report-connid-changes
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 request-collection-time
Switching Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
One-to-One mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 request-tout
OpenCall section configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 48, 168
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 192 reroute
openTimeout ISCC transaction type. . . . . . . . . . 58, 61
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 reservation-time
origination location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
origination T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 resource-allocation-mode
resource-load-maximum
240 Framework 8.1

Index
route sync-reconnect-tout
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . 48, 59, 61, 94 configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
route-dn
route-uui T
ISCC transaction type . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
routing Target ISCC
Inter Server Call Control. . . . . . . . . 52–65 Access Code configuration . . . . . . . . . 91
Default Access Code configuration . . . . . 90
rule-<n>
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 189, 193
run.bat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
tcs-queue
run.sh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
tcs-use
S configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
time_convert
sccpServiceType common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 time_format
security section common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
common configuration options . . . .149, 178 timeout
segment configuration option . . . . . . . . . . 48, 169
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 timeout value format
server-id configuration options . . . . . . . . . 178–179
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Timers section
Service Numbers configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Network T-Server for AT&T . . . . . . . . 115 TInitiateConference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SetFeatureInvocation error messages . . . . 128 TInitiateTransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
setting configuration options TMakeCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 TMuteTransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
sml section trace
common options . . . . . . . . . . . .149–151 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
spool transaction types (ISCC). . . . . . . . . . 47, 52
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
square brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 transfer connect service . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ss7 Translation Rules section
ssn troubleshooting
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 TX4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
standard TRouteCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 trunk lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
starting T-Server
HA Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 configuring Application objects . . . . . . . 37
T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 for multi-sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Supported Functionality multi-site operation . . . . . . . . . . 87–100
Network T-Server for AT&T . . . . . . . . 117 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 110
suspending-wait-timeout using Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . 37
common configuration option . . . . . . . 150 multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 TServer section
multi-site operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 configuration options . . . . . . . . . 154–159
switch partitioning TSingleStepTransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 TX3220
T-Server support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Switching Office installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Network T-Server for AT&T . . . . . . . . 115 TX4000
Switching Office objects . . . . . . . . . . . 35 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
multi-site operation . . . . . . . 88, 89, 90, 94 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Index
TXRouteType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 x-conn-debug-dns
type styles common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 x-conn-debug-open
italic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
monospace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 x-conn-debug-security
type-table-file common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 x-conn-debug-select
typographical styles . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234 common log option . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
x-conn-debug-timers
U x-conn-debug-write
UNIX
installing T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
starting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
starting HA Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
starting T-Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
starting with run.sh . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
use-data-from
use-implicit-access-numbers
use-purge-by-size
user data propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
user-data-limit
V
V
command line parameters. . . . . . . . . 102
VDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
verbose
version numbering, document . . . . . . . . 233
voice processing failure messages. . . . . . 128
W
warm standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Windows
installing T-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
starting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
starting HA Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
starting T-Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
starting with run.bat . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
X
x-conn-debug-all
x-conn-debug-api
242 Framework 8.1

81fr Dep-Ts Att

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

81fr Dep-Ts Att

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

81fr Dep-Ts Att

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Framework 8.

Network T-Server for AT&T

Copyright © 2004–2012 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security

Technical Support from VARs

Technical Support from Genesys

Ordering and Licensing Information

Document Version: 81fr_dep-ts_att_01-2012_v8.1.001.00

Part 1 T-Server Deployment .................................................. 13

Chapter 1 T-Server Fundamentals........................................................................ 15

Chapter 2 T-Server General Deployment ............................................................. 29

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 3

Chapter 3 Multi-Site Support................................................................................. 43

Chapter 4 Starting and Stopping T-Server Components ................................. 101

Part 2 T-Server Configuration ............................................. 113

Chapter 5 AT&T–Specific Configuration............................................................ 115

Chapter 6 Supported Functionality in Network T-Server for AT&T................. 117

Chapter 7 Common Configuration Options....................................................... 131

Chapter 8 T-Server Common Configuration Options ....................................... 153

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 5

ISCC/COF Options ........................................................................... 170

Chapter 9 Configuration Options in Network T-Server for AT&T .................... 181

Supplements Related Documentation Resources ................................................... 231

Document Conventions ...................................................................... 233

Index ............................................................................................................... 235

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 7

This preface contains the following sections:

About Network T-Server for AT&T

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 9

Making Comments on This Document

Contacting Genesys Technical Support

Region Telephone E-Mail

North America and +888-369-5555 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com

Europe, Middle East, and +44-(0)-1276-45-7002 support@genesyslab.co.uk

Asia Pacific +61-7-3368-6868 support@genesyslab.com.au

Malaysia 1-800-814-472 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com.au

India 000-800-100-7136 (toll-free) support@genesyslab.com.au

Japan +81-3-6361-8950 support@genesyslab.co.jp

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 11

Document Change History

New for All T-Servers in 8.1

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 13

• T-Server now supports the Unresponsive Process Detection feature. The

Notes: • Configuration option changes common to all T-Servers are

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 15

Learning About T-Server

Framework and Media Layer Architecture

Figure 1: Framework in a Genesys Solution

Figure 2: The Media Layer in the Framework Architecture

T-Server is the heart of the Media Layer—translating the information of the

Internet Traditional VoIP

Interaction T-Servers for

Figure 3: Media Layer Architecture

In addition to being the most important component of the Media Layer,

Network T-Server—Deployment Guide 17

outbound dialing to still others. Framework in general, and T-Server in

T-Server Requests and Events

Details of T-Server Functionality

Difference and Likeness Across T-Servers